JP2018068377A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in player's interest by allowing a player to enjoy a movable performance by a movable decorative body by preventing damage to the movable decorative body.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine is allowed to be equipped with a back rear movable decorative body 3120 capable of moving vertically on a front of a performance display device; a lock member 3141 rotated between a lock position for regulating movement toward a lower part of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 and an unlocking position for unlocking the regulation; a slide guide 3134 capable of abutting on the back rear movable decorative body 3120 from a lower side; a back rear drive motor 3135 for moving the slide guide 3134 vertically and for rotating the lock member 3141 via the slide guide 3134 and a transmission slider 3142; and a damper 3146 provided near a movement end at a lower side of the back rear movable decorative body 3120, the damper 3146 collides with the back rear movable decorative body 3120 and stops movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3120.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 136

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine (generally also referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a multi-function machine (generally also referred to as “parrot machine”) in which a pachinko machine and a spinning machine are fused. Is.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area, and a game A plurality of entrances (general winning entrances, starting entrances, variable winning entrances (variable starting entrances, large winning entrances, bonuses) that are allowed to receive game media within the area and grant a privilege according to the acceptance of the game media. Winning a prize opening), V winning a prize opening, etc.). Then, when the game medium is received at the entrance, a privilege (payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage, etc.) is given, so the game medium is sent to the entrance to the player. It is possible to entertain the game medium driving operation so as to be accepted.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed one that includes a movable decorative body that moves in the vertical direction in accordance with a gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area (for example, Patent Document 1). In the technique of Patent Document 1, a belt is wound around a pair of pulleys that are separated from each other vertically, and a movable decorative body is attached to a part of the belt. By moving around, the movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction.

  However, in the technique of Patent Document 1, since the movable decorative body is prevented from dropping only by the rotation resistance by the drive motor, the load on the drive motor is increased, and the drive motor may break down early. It was. Moreover, in the technique of Patent Document 1, depending on the speed at which the movable decorative body is moved downward, the movable decorative body collides with a member that restricts the moving end on the lower side of the movable decorative body, and the member and the movable decorative body are moved. There is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be reduced by causing damage to the game and interrupting the game.

JP, 2014-151076, A

  Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent a movable decoration body from being damaged and prevent a decrease in the interest of the player by making the movable decoration body enjoyable. It is to be an issue.

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“A front component that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area where the game is played,
A transparent flat gaming panel which is provided on the rear side of the front component member and has the gaming area formed on the front surface;
On the rear side of the game panel, an effect display means provided to be visible from the front through the game panel in the center of the game area in front view, and capable of displaying an effect image,
A movable decorative body which is provided in front of the effect display means and behind the game panel so as to be movable in a predetermined direction and to which a force for moving to a specific side which is one side of the predetermined direction is constantly acting. When,
A locking position that is provided in the vicinity of the moving end of the movable decorative body opposite to the specific side on the rear side of the game panel, and that restricts movement to the specific side by contacting the movable decorative body; A lock member movable between a release position that releases the restriction of movement to the specific side by not contacting the movable decorative body,
A slide guide provided on the rear side of the gaming panel so as to be movable in the predetermined direction, and capable of contacting the movable decorative body from the specific side;
The slide guide from a position on the specific side of the movable decorative body to a position on the specific side to a position where the movable decorative body can be restricted from moving to the specific side by the lock member; and Drive means for moving the lock member between the lock position and the release position;
The movable decorative body is provided near the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body on the rear side of the game panel, and the movable decorative body moved to the specific side by a force acting at all times collides with the movable decorative body. And a fluid damper that stops the movement of the body ".

  Here, as “game”, “a game medium aiming at a predetermined receiving port (for example, a start port, a variable start port, etc.) in which a special lottery for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous is performed. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by receiving a game medium at a predetermined receiving port is drawn, a specific receiving port (for example, a variable receiving port) that pays out a predetermined number of game media by receiving the game medium. A prize opening, a grand prize opening, a prize winning opening, etc.) are opened, so that a game in which a game medium is struck aiming at a specific entry point, an entrance to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is granted ( For example, a game in which a game medium is struck aiming at a general prize opening, a start opening, a big prize opening, an accessory prize opening, a V prize opening, etc.) Display a variety of symbols (for example, the rotator body) , After rotating), the game "to stop the variable display of symbol rows each such benefits including payout of game media is a combination of symbols to be applied, and the like. Examples of the “game medium” include “sphere-shaped (game ball)”, “disc-shaped (medal)”, and the like.

  In addition, the “game area” in which the game is performed includes “a plurality of entrances to which a game medium is thrown in by a player's operation and a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given according to the reception of the game medium. `` Areas that are in play '', `` Each is equipped with a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's starting operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stopping operation '' The area | region where the some rotating body to which the privilege including payout | payout of a game medium is provided according to this is arrange | positioned "etc. are mentioned.

  In addition, as the “pre-constituent member”, “transparent”, “transparent surface with glazed irregularities”, “opaque through which light is transmitted”, “opaque”, Etc. In addition, examples of the “front component member” include “a frame-shaped member that divides the entire outer periphery of the game region”, “a member that divides a part of the outer periphery of the game region”, and the like.

  Furthermore, the “game panel” may be transparent and may be “acrylic resin plate”, “polycarbonate resin plate”, “ABS resin plate”, “polypropylene plate”, “polyarylate resin plate”, “methacrylic resin plate”. , “Glass plate”, and the like. In addition, the “game panel” includes “a transparent flat panel panel in which a game area is formed on the front surface, and a panel holder that holds the outer periphery of the panel board and is provided on the rear side of the front component member. And the like ”,“ what is made of a single transparent flat plate ”, and the like.

  “Production display means” include “liquid crystal display (LCD)”, “cathode ray tube (CRT) display device (CRT)”, “plasma display”, “laser display”, “LED display device”, “organic” EL display device "," electronic paper display device ", and the like.

  Further, examples of the visual recognition through the game panel include “the game panel has an opening that penetrates in the front and rear direction and is visible through the opening”, “the visual display through the transparent game panel”, and the like. It is done.

  In addition, as the “movable decorative body”, “attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction (predetermined direction), and the force to move downward (specific side) by gravity is always acting”, "Mounted so that it can move in the left-right direction (predetermined direction), and the force to move to one side (specific side) of the moving direction by the urging force of the elastic member always acts", "Up-down direction It is attached so as to be movable in a (predetermined direction), and a force to move it upward (specific side) against the force of gravity by the urging force of the elastic member is always acting ". .

  In addition, as “decoration” of “movable ornament”, “decoration of items in line with the concept of gaming machines”, “decoration of logos or lines in accordance with the concept of gaming machines”, “decoration of gaming machines” Examples include “decoration that imitates characters in accordance with the concept”, “decoration of geometric patterns”, “decoration of animals and plants”, “decoration of scenery and background”, and the like.

  Furthermore, examples of the “lock member” include “a member that rotates between the lock position and the release position”, “a member that moves forward and backward between the lock position and the release position”, and the like.

  In addition, the “slide guide” includes “a position on the specific side with respect to the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body and a specific side with respect to a portion where the movable decorative body is restricted from moving to the specific side by the lock member”. What can be moved between the position on the opposite side "," the position of the moving end of the movable decorative body on the specific side, and the part where the movable decorative body is restricted from moving to the specific side by the lock member " "Moveable to a position opposite to the specific side", "The position of the movable end on the specific side of the movable decorative body and the movement of the movable decorative body to the specific side is regulated by the lock member And the like that can be moved between the two positions.

  The “driving means” includes “a driving motor, a female screw shaft that is rotated by the driving motor and extends in the moving direction, and a movement that is engaged with the female screw shaft to move the slide guide and the lock member. A pair of pulleys spaced apart in the moving direction, a drive motor that rotates one pulley, a belt wound around the pair of pulleys, and a part of the belt. "Attached and slidable in the moving direction, and equipped with a slide guide and a moving slider for moving the locking member", "with a solenoid for moving the locking member" And the like.

  Furthermore, examples of the “driving means” include “a member that moves the lock member by moving the slide guide”, “a member that moves the slide guide and the lock member separately”, and the like. As the movement of the lock member from the lock position to the release position by the slide guide, “a transmission slider that moves the lock member by being pushed to the specific side by the slide guide moved to the specific side moving end and sliding to the specific side” Equipped with "a transmission wire that moves the lock member when it is pushed to the specified side by the slide guide moved to the moving end on the specified side and pulled to the specified side", "with the movement of the slide guide In addition, it includes a transmission guide that moves in the opposite direction to the slide guide and moves the lock member in contact with the lock member when the slide guide moves to the moving end on the specific side.

  Further, as the “fluid damper”, “a damper body in which a fluid is sealed and a piston in which an orifice is formed is movably inserted; a piston rod extending from the piston to the outside of the damper body; "With a contact receiving part attached to the tip of the piston rod and against which the movable decorative body collides", "fluid is enclosed, and at least the portion where the movable decorative body collides can be deformed Thing ", etc. are mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the front component member that divides the outer periphery of the game area where the game is performed, and the game area is formed on the front surface. From the transparent flat gaming panel and the rear side of the gaming panel, provided at the center of the front view gaming area so as to be visible from the front through the gaming panel, and the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image, and the effect display means And a movable decorative body that is provided in front of and behind the gaming panel so as to be movable in a predetermined direction, and to which a force for moving to a specific side, which is one side of the predetermined direction, is constantly acting, and the rear side of the gaming panel Is provided in the vicinity of the moving end opposite to the specific side of the movable decorative body, and a lock position that restricts the movement to the specific side by contacting the movable decorative body and by not contacting the movable decorative body Move to a specific side A lock member movable between a release position for releasing the control, a slide guide provided on the rear side of the game panel so as to be movable in a predetermined direction, and capable of contacting the movable decorative body from a specific side, and a slide Between the position of the guide on the specific side relative to the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body and the position where the movable decorative body can be restricted from moving to the specific side by the lock member, and the lock member in the locked position and the release position Between the driving means for moving and the movable decorative body which is provided near the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body on the rear side of the game panel, and moved to the specific side by the force acting at all times. A fluid damper that collides and stops the movement of the movable decorative body.

  A force to move the movable decorative body of this configuration to a specific side, which is one side of the moving direction, is constantly acting. In a normal state, the lock member provided near the moving end on the opposite side to the specific side of the movable decorative body is in the locked position, and is locked by the force that the movable decorative body is constantly acting on. Abutting on the member, the movement of the movable decorative body to the specific side is restricted. Thereby, the movable decorative body is seen at a predetermined position in the front view game area between the effect display means and the game panel which can be seen through the transparent game panel formed on the front side of the game area. And when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, the force that is constantly acting to move the movable decorative body to the specific side is the opposite side to the specific side in the predetermined direction (movement direction). It moves from the vicinity of the moving end to the moving end on the specific side, and collides with the fluid damper to stop. After that, when the slide guide is moved in the opposite direction to the specific side by the driving means and brought into contact with the movable decorative body from the specific side, the movable decorative body is moved in the opposite direction to the specific side by the slide guide, By moving the movable decorative body to a position where the movement to the specific side can be regulated by the lock member, by moving the lock member to the lock position by the driving means and bringing the movable decorative body into contact with the lock member, The normal state can be restored.

  Thus, in a normal state, the movable decorative body is arranged at a predetermined position between the effect display means and the game panel which can be seen through the transparent game panel having a game area formed on the front surface. A movable decorative body decorates a part of the area. Then, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, the movable decorative body is produced by the force that is constantly acting from the vicinity of the moving end on the side opposite to the specific side to the moving end on the specific side. Since the front of the display means moves, the movable decorative body blocks the effect image displayed on the effect display means, thereby allowing the player to notice the movement of the movable decorative body, and moving the player's interest. By attracting the decoration body strongly, the player can be surprised by the movement of the movable decoration body, and the movement of the movable decoration body can be enjoyed. It can be thought that there is a good thing, it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest. At this time, since the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper and stops, the load and inertial force of the movable decorative body can be absorbed by the fluid damper, and the impact on the movable decorative body can be reduced. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the movable decorative body, and to make the player enjoy the movable performance and the game by the movable decorative body and to suppress the decrease in the interest Can do.

  In addition, since the impact due to the collision of the movable decorative body can be absorbed by the fluid damper, the inertial force when moving to a specific side by the force acting constantly by making the movable decorative body larger or heavier. Even if it becomes large, the impact due to the large inertia force can be sufficiently absorbed by the fluid damper to stop the movable decorative body, and even a large movable decorative body can be made difficult to break. Therefore, it is possible to make a larger movable ornamental body or a movable ornamental body capable of various movements in which another movable ornamental body is provided together with a driving source that increases the weight. It can be a gaming machine that can be enjoyed.

  Further, since the slide guide can be moved by the driving means from a position on the specific side with respect to the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body to a position where the movement of the movable decorative body to the specific side can be regulated by the lock member. When the sliding guide is brought into contact with the movable decorative body located on the specific side of the lock member from the specific side by the driving means and the slide guide is moved in a predetermined direction, the movable decorative body is moved together with the slide guide. The body can be arbitrarily moved in a predetermined direction. Thereby, in addition to the movable effect that the movable decorative body moves to the moving end on the specific side at once, the movable decorative body moves back and forth in a predetermined direction and vibrates between the moving end on the specific side and the lock member. Therefore, a variety of movable effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the slide guide that moves in a predetermined direction by the driving means is made to contact the movable decorative body from the specific side, the lock member and the slide guide always act on the specific side. It is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from moving to a specific side by force. In other words, the lock member and the slide guide can be double-locked, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction that the movable decorative body moves to the specific side without permission. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the effect display means is provided, the effect image is displayed on the effect display means, so that the player can be entertained also by the effect image, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. . Furthermore, since the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image is provided, by displaying the effect image adapted to the movement of the movable decorative body, the collaboration effect (for example, the effect image) by the movable decorative object and the effect image is displayed. Can be used to create a movement that moves the movable ornament by the character that is displayed on the screen, or a movement that moves the character by moving the movable decoration, etc.). It can be difficult to suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the protective stopper which is provided in the position where a clearance gap is formed between the movable decorative body when it collides with the fluid damper on the rear side of the game panel, and restricts the movement of the movable decorative body to the specific side May be further provided. Thereby, when the movable decorative body cannot be stopped by the fluid damper because the momentum of the movable decorative body is too good or the fluid damper is deteriorated, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the protective stopper, Since the further movement of the movable decorative body to the specific side can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from colliding with other members and damaging the movable decorative body and other members. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect.

  Further, when the protective stopper as described above is provided, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the protective stopper even if the fluid damper is deteriorated or damaged. When contact is made, a sound (contact sound) is generated, so that the contact sound causes the player or the staff of the game hall where the gaming machine is installed to recognize that a failure has occurred. It is possible to perform maintenance before a serious problem occurs such that the movable decorative body is damaged and the game is interrupted.

  Furthermore, before the movable member is moved to the specific side by moving the lock member from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, the portion of the slide guide that comes into contact with the movable ornament collides with the fluid damper. It is desirable to move to a position on the specific side of the movable decorative body. As a result, the movable decorative body is moved to the opposite side of the specific side before the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, and the movable decorative body is moved to the specific side to collide with the fluid damper. Since the slide guide is moved from the specific side to a position on the specific side with respect to the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body, the lock member is unlocked. Even if the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper, the movable decorative body does not collide with the slide guide, and damage to the slide guide can be prevented.

  Further, on the rear side of the game panel, a release contact portion that extends in a predetermined direction and is slidable in a predetermined direction and is capable of contacting a slide guide that has been moved to a specific side moving end by a driving means, In addition, a transmission slider having a transmission unit that moves the lock member between the lock position and the release position by sliding in a predetermined direction may be further provided. Thus, when the slide guide is moved to the moving end on the specific side by the driving means, the slide guide comes into contact with the release contact portion of the transmission slider, and the release slide portion is pressed toward the specific side, whereby the transmission slide is moved to the specific side. It will slide to. When the transmission slider slides to the specific side, the transmission portion also slides to the specific side, so that the lock member moves from the lock position to the release position by the movement of the transmission portion to the specific side, and is in contact with the lock member The movable decorative body is released from contact with the lock member, and the movable decorative body moves to the moving end on the specific side by the force that is constantly acting on the specific side, and the above-described effects are obtained. A gaming machine can be embodied.

  In addition, when the transmission slider as described above is provided, the movement of the slide guide to the specific end is transmitted to the lock member by the transmission slider, and the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position. In the driving means, both the movement of the slide guide and the movement of the locking member can be performed by one driving source in the driving means, so there is no need to separately provide a driving source for moving the locking member, and the movable decorative body It is possible to suppress an increase in the load related to the control of the movable effect using the control, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the movable decorative object does not move due to the overload, and the movable effect by the movable decorative object is surely achieved. It can be performed, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the movable performance and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lock member extends in a predetermined direction and is provided on the rear side of the game panel so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward with an end portion on the specific side as a center. A restricting portion protruding at a right angle from the end opposite to the end on the side, the restricting portion can come into contact with the movable decorative body when in the locked position, and rotate when in the released position Thus, the restricting portion may move to the side opposite to the specific side so that it cannot be brought into contact with the movable decorative body. As a result, when the lock of the movable decorative body is released, the lock member is moved to the side opposite to the specific side, that is, to the side opposite to the direction in which the movable decorative body is about to move. Because it is rotated, even if the force that always acts from the movable decorative body side to the specific side is strong, the movable decorative body can be made difficult to come off from the restricting portion, and the movable decorative body can move to the moving end on the specific side without permission. This can be surely prevented. In this case, since the movable decorative body can be prevented from moving to the specific side without permission, it is possible to avoid causing the player to feel distrust due to the arbitrary movement. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of a person.

  Further, when the lock member is provided with the main body portion and the restriction portion as described above, as described above, the movable decorative body is prevented from being detached from the lock member (restriction portion) and freely moving. Therefore, the movable decorative body can be moved by releasing the lock at a desired timing according to the gaming state, and the effect of the movable effect using the movable decorative body can be surely exhibited.

  Furthermore, when the lock member is provided with the main body portion and the restricting portion as described above, the lock member restricting portion is movable when the lock member is unlocked by the lock member as described above. Since the lock member is rotated so that the body moves to the opposite side with respect to the direction (specific side) in which the body moves, and the movable decorative body is difficult to be removed from the restricting portion, for example, the movable decorative body is Even if it has a shape that extends in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined moving direction and is easy to tilt, it can be provided with a larger movable decorative body without detaching from the restricting portion of the lock member. By moving, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body, and the player has an advantage over the player. Can skill state reminiscent strong that it would be produced, let me raise expectations for the game can be suppressed lowering of interest.

  In addition, the movable decorative body can be brought into contact with the lock member from the specific side, and with the guide portion extending obliquely so as to move to the release position side toward the specific side, The lock member may be moved from the lock position to the release position when the movable decorative body moving in the direction opposite to the specific side from the specific side is brought into contact with the guide portion by the slide guide. Accordingly, the movable decorative body that has been unlocked by the locking member by the driving means and moved to the moving end on the specific side is moved to the opposite side to the specific side by the driving means via the slide guide, and the locking member When moving to a position where locking is possible (the side opposite to the specific side relative to the locking member), the movable decorative body comes into contact with the guiding portion in the locked position so that the guiding member is inclined with respect to the locking member. A force to move to the release position side acts, and the lock member moves to the release position side. That is, when the movable decorative body is returned to the original state (normal state), the lock member is moved to the release position side with the movement of the movable decorative body without moving the lock member to the release position side by the driving means. It can be moved automatically. Therefore, when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state, it is not necessary to control the movement of the lock member by the driving means, the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced, and the movable effect is not effective due to overload. It becomes possible to prevent the player from being entertained and becoming less entertaining by being stable.

  Further, a lock urging means that urges the lock member to move from the release position side to the lock position side may be further provided. As a result, when the drive member releases the drive after the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the drive means, the lock member is automatically moved from the release position to the lock position by the lock urging means. Therefore, even if the lock member is not returned to the lock position by the driving means, it can be returned to the lock position by the lock urging means. Therefore, when the lock member is returned to the lock position (normal state), it is not necessary to control the movement of the lock member by the driving means, so the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced and the movable member can be moved by overload. It is possible to prevent a player from being entertained due to instability in the control of the production and deteriorating the interest.

  Further, when the transmission slider and the lock urging means are provided as described above, the transmission slider is urged in the direction opposite to the specific side by the lock urging means, so that the transmission portion of the transmission slider is moved. The locking member may be biased to the lock position side. As a result, the lock biasing means is adapted to press the release contact portion toward the specific side in a state where the slide guide is moved to the moving end on the specific side by the drive means and is brought into contact with the release contact portion of the transmission slider. When the slide guide is moved further to the specific side against the urging force, the transmission slider moves to the specific side together with the slide guide, and the lock member moves from the lock position to the release position. The contacted movable decorative body is released from the lock member, and moves to the moving end on the specific side by the force always acting on the specific side. After that, when the drive means moves the slide guide to the side opposite to the specific side, the transmission slider slides to the side opposite to the specific side by the biasing force of the lock biasing means. The lock member can be returned from the release position to the lock position, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  Further, when the lock member is provided with the main body portion and the restriction portion as described above, the lock member protrudes from the end portion on the specific side of the main body portion to the side opposite to the restriction portion, and the transmission portion of the transmission slider An engaging transmission protrusion is further provided, and a slide of the transmission slider is transmitted to the transmission protrusion via the transmission section so that the lock member rotates between the lock position and the release position. May be. As a result, the locking member is provided with a transmission protrusion that protrudes in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction in which the movable decorative body moves and engages with the transmission part of the transmission slider. When the transmission slider slides in a predetermined direction due to the movement of, the transmission portion of the transmission slider presses the transmission protrusion in the predetermined direction, and the lock member is easily rotated by pressing the transmission protrusion in the predetermined direction. It can be made to move, and it can make it easy to embody the game machine which exhibits the effect mentioned above.

  The specific side on which the force for moving the movable decorative body is always applied may be defined as the lower side after setting the predetermined direction in which the movable decorative body moves to the vertical direction. Thereby, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, the movable decorative body will drop vigorously downward due to the constantly acting gravity. It can give a strong impact, attract the player's interest to the movable decoration body, and make the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, since the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper and stops, the load and inertial force of the movable decorative body can be absorbed by the fluid damper, and the impact on the movable decorative body can be reduced. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the movable decorative body, and to make the player enjoy the movable performance and the game by the movable decorative body and to suppress the decrease in the interest Can do.

  In addition, when the movable decorative body is moved downward by gravity that is constantly acting, it is not necessary to have a mechanism for constantly applying a force to move the movable decorative body to the specific side, and the movable decorative body is not required. The configuration relating to the movement of the mobile phone can be simplified, the configuration relating to the movement can be made compact, and the movable decorative body can be enlarged by the amount of the compact space. It is possible to make the player stand out and attract the player's interest strongly, and to delight the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the movable decorative body may extend so as to straddle the effect display means in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction. Thereby, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, a large movable decorative body that straddles the effect display means moves so as to cross or cross the front side of the effect display means. By blocking the effect image displayed on the effect display means by the movable decorative body, it is possible to make the player notice the movement of the movable decorative body, and to attract the player's interest strongly to the movable decorative body. it can. In addition, the movement of the large movable decorative body can give a strong impact to the player, can attract the player's interest strongly to the movable decorative body, and also the player against the player It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the movable decorative body is sized so as to straddle the effect display means, the weight of the movable decorative body increases, so that the movable decorative body acts on the movable decorative body when moved to a specific side by a force that is constantly acting. However, since a fluid damper is provided near the moving end on the specific side, the movable decorative body with increased weight collides with the fluid damper, so that the impact due to the large inertial force The movable decorative body can be stopped by being sufficiently absorbed by the damper, and the same effect as described above can be obtained without making the large movable decorative body easily damaged.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
“It is provided at a position where a gap is formed between the game panel and the movable decorative body when it collides with the fluid damper, and the movement of the movable decorative body to the specific side is restricted. The protective stopper
It is further equipped ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the gaming machine is provided at a position where a gap is formed between the gaming machine and the movable decorative body when it collides with the fluid damper on the rear side of the gaming panel, to the specific side of the movable decorative body. Further, a protective stopper for restricting the movement is provided.

  Thereby, when the movable decorative body cannot be stopped by the fluid damper because the momentum of the movable decorative body is too good or the fluid damper is deteriorated, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the protective stopper, Since the further movement of the movable decorative body to the specific side can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from colliding with other members and damaging the movable decorative body and other members. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect.

  In addition, when the fluid damper is deteriorated or damaged, as described above, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the protective stopper. ) Will be generated, so that the contact sound can cause the player and the staff of the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed to recognize that a malfunction has occurred, Maintenance can be performed before a serious failure occurs that breaks and interrupts the game.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
"The drive means is
Before moving the movable decorative body from the locked position to the release position and moving the movable decorative body to the specific side, a portion of the slide guide that contacts the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper. It is characterized in that it is “moved to a position on the specific side with respect to the movable decorative body at the time”.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, before the drive means moves the lock member from the lock position to the release position and moves the movable decorative body to the specific side, the portion where the slide guide comes into contact with the movable decorative body is the fluid damper. Is moved to a position on the specific side of the movable decorative body at the time of collision.

  As a result, the movable decorative body is moved to the opposite side of the specific side before the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, and the movable decorative body is moved to the specific side to collide with the fluid damper. Since the slide guide is moved from the specific side to a position on the specific side with respect to the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body, the lock member is unlocked. Even if the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper, the movable decorative body does not collide with the slide guide, and damage to the slide guide can be prevented.

  When the driving means moves the slide guide to a position on the specific side with respect to the moving end on the specific side that does not contact the movable decorative body, the movement of the slide guide to that position is transmitted to lock the lock member in the locked position. You may make it move to a cancellation | release position. As a result, both the movement of the slide guide and the movement of the lock member can be performed by a single driving means, so there is no need to separately provide a drive source such as a solenoid or a drive motor for moving the lock member. It is possible to suppress an increase in the load related to the control of the movable effect using the control, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the movable decorative object does not move due to the overload, and the movable effect by the movable decorative object is surely achieved. It can be performed, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the movable performance and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“A rear side of the gaming panel is provided so as to extend in the predetermined direction and be slidable in the predetermined direction, and can be brought into contact with the slide guide moved to the moving end on the specific side by the driving means. A transmission slider having a release contact portion and a transmission portion that moves the lock member between the lock position and the release position by sliding in the predetermined direction;
It is further equipped ”.

  Here, examples of the “transmission slider” include “a strip-like one extending in a predetermined direction”, “a rod-like one extending in a predetermined direction”, and the like.

  The “transmission slider” includes “the transmission portion is a transmission pin that is slidably inserted into the transmission long hole of the lock member, and the lock member is moved by sliding in a predetermined direction”, “the transmission portion is , A transmission elongated hole into which the transmission pin of the lock member is slidably inserted, and the lock member is moved by sliding in a predetermined direction ”,“ a transmission rack gear that meshes with the transmission gear of the lock member, And the like that move the lock member by sliding in a predetermined direction.

  By the way, when the lock member and the slide guide are moved by separate drive sources as drive means, a drive source for moving the movable decorative body and a drive source for moving the lock member are provided. Since it is necessary to control both, the load on the control of the movable effect using the movable decorative body is increased, and there is a problem that the movable decorative object freezes or the movable decorative object malfunctions. There is a risk of doing. If a malfunction occurs in the control of the movable effect, the movable decorative body does not move as desired, so that the player cannot entertain the movable effect, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the gaming panel so as to extend in a predetermined direction and be slidable in the predetermined direction, and is moved to a specific side moving end by the driving means; A transmission slider having a release contact portion that can be contacted and a transmission portion that moves the lock member between the lock position and the release position by sliding in a predetermined direction is further provided. .

  Thus, when the slide guide is moved to the moving end on the specific side by the driving means, the slide guide comes into contact with the release contact portion of the transmission slider, and the release slide portion is pressed toward the specific side, whereby the transmission slide is moved to the specific side. It will slide to. When the transmission slider slides to the specific side, the transmission portion also slides to the specific side, so that the lock member moves from the lock position to the release position by the movement of the transmission portion to the specific side, and is in contact with the lock member The movable decorative body is released from contact with the lock member, and the movable decorative body moves to the moving end on the specific side by the force that is constantly acting on the specific side, and the above-described effects are obtained. A gaming machine can be embodied.

  Further, the movement of the slide guide toward the specific end is transmitted to the lock member by the transmission slider, and the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position. Since both the movement of the slide guide and the movement of the lock member can be performed, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for moving the lock member, and the load applied to the control of the movable effect using the movable decorative body is increased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction that prevents the movable decorative body from moving due to an overload, and it is possible to reliably perform the movable performance by the movable decorative body, so that the player can enjoy the movable performance. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The locking member is
A main body portion that extends in the predetermined direction and is provided on the rear side of the game panel so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward around the end portion on the specific side;
A restricting portion protruding perpendicularly from an end opposite to the end on the specific side of the main body, and the restricting portion can come into contact with the movable decorative body when in the locked position, and the release When it is in the position, the restricting portion moves to the side opposite to the specific side by rotation, and cannot be brought into contact with the movable decorative body.

  Here, as the “lock member”, “a projecting protrusion that protrudes from the end portion on the specific side of the main body portion to the side opposite to the restricting portion and is rotated by the movement of the slide guide is transmitted, "A guide portion that extends obliquely so as to move toward the main body as it goes toward the specific side, and is rotated from the lock position to the release position when the movable decorative body abuts from the specific side. Equipped with a stopper for restricting rotation from the lock position to the opposite side of the release position, and "biased to the lock position side by the lock urging means" And the like "and" the one that is rotated from the release position to the lock position by the slide guide that moves in the direction opposite to the specific side ".

  By the way, when the lock member is moved forward and backward in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction (predetermined direction) of the movable decorative body between the lock position and the release position, the movable decoration is provided on the protruding tip side of the lock member. When the body comes into contact, the lock member is easily tilted. Depending on the size and weight of the movable decorative body, the lock member may be tilted and the movable decorative body may come off and fall. By moving away from the lock member and moving freely, some players may feel distrust and there is a risk that the interest in games will be reduced.

  According to the structure of the means 5, the lock member extends in a predetermined direction, and a main body provided on the rear side of the game panel so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction around an end on the specific side. In addition, the regulation part can come into contact with the movable decorative body when in the locked position after being provided with a regulation part protruding at a right angle from the end part on the opposite side to the end part on the specific side of the main body part. At the position, the restricting portion is moved to the side opposite to the specific side by rotation so that it cannot be brought into contact with the movable decorative body.

  As a result, when the lock of the movable decorative body is released, the lock member is moved to the side opposite to the specific side, that is, to the side opposite to the direction in which the movable decorative body is about to move. Because it is rotated, even if the force that always acts from the movable decorative body side to the specific side is strong, the movable decorative body can be made difficult to come off from the restricting portion, and the movable decorative body can move to the moving end on the specific side without permission. This can be surely prevented. Moreover, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from moving to the specific side without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful due to the arbitrary movement, and the player's game It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the.

  In addition, as described above, since the movable decorative body can be prevented from moving out of the lock member (regulator), the lock can be unlocked and moved at a desired timing according to the gaming state. The decorative body can be moved, and the production effect by the movable effect using the movable decorative body can be surely exhibited.

  Further, as described above, when the movable decorative body is unlocked by the lock member, the restricting portion of the lock member moves to the opposite side with respect to the direction (specific side) in which the movable decorative body is about to move. For example, the movable decorative body has a shape that is easy to tilt and extends long in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction of movement. However, it is possible to provide a larger movable decorative body without moving out of the restricting portion of the lock member, and by moving the large movable decorative body, a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player to the movable decorative body, and to make the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur. That let me raise expectations thereby suppress the reduction of interest.

  In addition, since the lock member is attached near the moving end opposite to the specific side of the movable decorative body, a certain distance (space) is provided between the locking member (regulator) and the moving end. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space in which the restricting portion can move when the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by moving the slide guide to the moving end on the specific side. Can be reliably rotated to the release position, and the movement of the movable decorative body can be locked or unlocked by the lock member.

  The lock member may be provided with a stopper for restricting the rotation from the lock position to the opposite side to the release position. Thereby, since the rotation of the lock member from the lock position to the side opposite to the release position is restricted by the stopper of the lock member, the force acting on the specific side from the movable decorative body side that is in contact with the restricting portion at the lock position is exerted. Even if it is strong, the lock member can be prevented from rotating away from the restricting portion by rotating to the opposite side of the release position, and the movable ornament can move to the moving end on the specific side without permission. This can be surely prevented.

  In addition, when the lock member is provided with the stopper as described above, it is desirable to include a lock urging means that urges the lock member in a direction in which the lock member is rotated from the release position side to the lock position. As a result, when the drive member releases the drive after the lock member is turned from the lock position to the release position by the drive means, the lock member is automatically turned from the release position to the lock position by the lock urging means. Therefore, the lock member can be returned to the lock position without returning the lock member to the lock position by driving the drive means. Therefore, when the lock member is returned to the locked position (normal state), it is not necessary to control the driving means, so that the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced, and the control of the movable effect is not possible due to overload. It becomes possible to prevent the player from being entertained and becoming less entertaining by becoming stable.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
"The locking member is
The movable decorative body can be contacted from the specific side, and includes a guide portion extending obliquely so as to move to the release position side toward the specific side,
The movable decorative body moving in the direction opposite to the specific side from the specific side is brought into contact with the guide portion by the slide guide, so that the guide portion is moved from the lock position to the release position. It is characterized by that.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the movable decorative body can be brought into contact with the lock member from the specific side, and the guide member extends obliquely so as to move to the release position side toward the specific side. In addition, the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position when the movable decorative body moving in the direction opposite to the specific side from the specific side by the slide guide comes into contact with the guide portion. Is.

  Accordingly, the movable decorative body that has been unlocked by the locking member by the driving means and moved to the moving end on the specific side is moved to the opposite side to the specific side by the driving means via the slide guide, and the locking member When moving to a position where locking is possible (the side opposite to the specific side relative to the locking member), the movable decorative body comes into contact with the guiding portion in the locked position so that the guiding member is inclined with respect to the locking member. A force to move to the release position side acts, and the lock member moves to the release position side. That is, when the movable decorative body is returned to the original state (normal state), the lock member is moved to the release position side with the movement of the movable decorative body without moving the lock member to the release position side by the driving means. It can be moved automatically. Therefore, when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state, it is not necessary to control the movement of the lock member by the driving means, the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced, and the movable effect is not effective due to overload. It becomes possible to prevent the player from being entertained and becoming less entertaining by being stable.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
“Lock urging means for urging the lock member to move from the release position side to the lock position side,
It is further equipped ”.

  Here, as “the lock urging means”, “the member that urges the lock member to the lock position via another member (for example, transmission slider)”, “one end of the lock member on the main body portion” , Which is biased to rotate to the lock position ”,“ so that one end abuts the lock member (part different from the main body) and rotates to the lock position. And the like ".

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the gaming machine is further provided with lock urging means for urging the lock member to move from the release position side to the lock position side.

  As a result, when the drive member releases the drive after the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the drive means, the lock member is automatically moved from the release position to the lock position by the lock urging means. Therefore, even if the lock member is not returned to the lock position by the driving means, it can be returned to the lock position by the lock urging means. Therefore, when the lock member is returned to the lock position (normal state), it is not necessary to control the movement of the lock member by the driving means, so the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced and the movable member can be moved by overload. It is possible to prevent a player from being entertained due to instability in the control of the production and deteriorating the interest.

Means 8: In the constitution of means 7,
“The lock urging means
By urging the transmission slider in a direction opposite to the specific side, the locking member is urged to the lock position side via the transmission portion of the transmission slider. And

  According to the structure of the means 8, the lock member is urged to the lock position side via the transmission portion of the transmission slider by urging the transmission slider in the direction opposite to the specific side by the lock urging means. Is.

  As a result, the lock biasing means is adapted to press the release contact portion toward the specific side in a state where the slide guide is moved to the moving end on the specific side by the drive means and is brought into contact with the release contact portion of the transmission slider. When the slide guide is moved further to the specific side against the urging force, the transmission slider moves to the specific side together with the slide guide, and the lock member moves from the lock position to the release position. The contacted movable decorative body is released from the lock member, and moves to the moving end on the specific side by the force always acting on the specific side. After that, when the drive means moves the slide guide to the side opposite to the specific side, the transmission slider slides to the side opposite to the specific side by the biasing force of the lock biasing means. The lock member can be returned from the release position to the lock position, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 9: In any one configuration from means 5 to means 8,
"The locking member is
A projecting protrusion that protrudes from the end portion on the specific side of the main body portion to the opposite side of the restricting portion, and is engaged with the transmitting portion of the transmitting slider,
In addition,
When the slide of the transmission slider is transmitted to the transmission protrusion via the transmission unit, the slide is rotated between the lock position and the release position.

  Here, as the “transmission protrusion and transmission section” to be engaged, “the transmission protrusion has a transmission slot extending in the protruding direction, and the transmission section of the transmission slider can be slid into the transmission slot. "Transmission pins inserted into the transmission", "Transmission protrusions are provided with cylindrical transmission pins, the transmission part of the transmission slider extends at right angles to a predetermined direction, and the transmission pins are slidably inserted. "A long hole", "A transmission portion of the transmission slider that can contact at least a side surface of the transmission protrusion facing the opposite side", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the lock member further includes a transmission protrusion that protrudes from the end portion on the specific side of the main body portion to the side opposite to the restriction portion and engages with the transmission portion of the transmission slider. The slide of the transmission slider is transmitted to the part via the transmission part, so that the lock member rotates between the lock position and the release position.

  As a result, the locking member is provided with a transmission protrusion that protrudes in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction in which the movable decorative body moves and engages with the transmission part of the transmission slider. When the transmission slider slides in a predetermined direction due to the movement of, the transmission portion of the transmission slider presses the transmission protrusion in the predetermined direction, and the lock member is easily rotated by pressing the transmission protrusion in the predetermined direction. It can be made to move, and it can make it easy to embody the game machine which exhibits the effect mentioned above.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
"The movable decorative body is
The predetermined direction is a vertical direction, and the specific side is a lower side ".

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the predetermined direction in which the movable decorative body moves is set as the vertical direction, and the specific side on which the force to move the movable decorative body is constantly acting is set as the lower side. is there.

  Thereby, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, the movable decorative body will drop vigorously downward due to the constantly acting gravity. It can give a strong impact, attract the player's interest to the movable decoration body, and make the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, since the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper and stops, the load and inertial force of the movable decorative body can be absorbed by the fluid damper, and the impact on the movable decorative body can be reduced. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the movable decorative body, and to make the player enjoy the movable performance and the game by the movable decorative body and to suppress the decrease in the interest Can do.

  In addition, since the movable decorative body is moved downward by the constantly acting gravity, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for constantly applying a force for moving the movable decorative body to the specific side, and the movable decorative body is not required. The structure relating to the movement of the body can be simplified, the structure relating to the movement can be made compact, and the movable decorative body can be enlarged by the amount of the compact space. It is possible to make the player stand out and attract the player's interest strongly, and to delight the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 11: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 10,
"The movable decorative body is
“It extends so as to straddle the effect display means in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction”.

  According to the structure of the means 11, the movable decorative body extends in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction so as to straddle the effect display means.

  Thereby, when the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position by the driving means, a large movable decorative body that straddles the effect display means moves so as to cross or cross the front side of the effect display means. By blocking the effect image displayed on the effect display means by the movable decorative body, it is possible to make the player notice the movement of the movable decorative body, and to attract the player's interest strongly to the movable decorative body. it can. In addition, the movement of the large movable decorative body can give a strong impact to the player, can attract the player's interest strongly to the movable decorative body, and also the player against the player It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the movable decorative body is sized so as to straddle the effect display means, and the weight of the movable decorative body increases, so that the movable decorative body acts on the movable decorative body when moved to a specific side by the force acting constantly. However, since a fluid damper is provided near the moving end on the specific side, the movable decorative body with increased weight collides with the fluid damper, so that the impact due to the large inertial force The movable decorative body can be stopped by being sufficiently absorbed by the damper, and the same effect as described above can be obtained without making the large movable decorative body easily damaged.

Means 12: In the gaming machine,
“A front component that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area where the game is played,
A transparent flat gaming panel which is provided on the rear side of the front component member and has the gaming area formed on the front surface;
On the rear side of the game panel, an effect display means provided to be visible from the front through the game panel in the center of the game area in front view, and capable of displaying an effect image,
A movable decorative body provided in front of the effect display means and behind the game panel so as to be movable in a vertical direction as a predetermined direction, and extending so as to straddle the effect display means in the left-right direction;
A main body portion extending in the vertical direction, a restricting portion protruding at a right angle from an end opposite to the lower end of the main body, and a side opposite to the restricting portion from the lower end of the main body And a guide portion extending obliquely so as to move from the front end side of the restricting portion toward the main body portion side toward the lower side, and the restricting portion and the movable decorative body A lock position for abutting and restricting the movement of the movable decorative body to the lower side, and a release position for releasing the contact with the movable decorative body by moving the regulating portion upward by rotation from the lock position. The movable decorative body is pivotable about an axis extending back and forth around the lower end portion of the main body portion and is moved upward from the lower side to the guide portion. Is rotated from the lock position to the release position by contacting Sea urchin, a lock member which is provided in the vicinity of the moving end on the side opposite to the lower side of the movable decorative body in the rear side of the game panel,
A slide guide which is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction on the rear side of the game panel, and capable of coming into contact with the movable decorative body from below;
A release contact portion that extends in the vertical direction and is slidable in the vertical direction on the rear side of the game panel and that can contact the slide guide moved to the moving end on the lower side, and the lock A transmission slider having a transmission portion engaged with the transmission protrusion of a member and rotating the lock member from the lock position to the release position by sliding downward;
Lock urging means for urging the transmission slider in a direction opposite to the lower side;
It is provided near the moving end on the lower side of the movable decorative body on the rear side of the game panel, and the movable decorative body that has moved downward due to the constantly acting gravity collides with the movable decorative body. A fluid damper that stops the movement;
Provided in a position where a gap is formed between the game panel and the movable decorative body when it collides with the fluid damper, and restricts the movement of the movable decorative body to the lower side. A protective stopper;
The movable decorative body is in a position where the slide guide is brought into contact with the release contact portion of the transmission slider and the transmission slider is slid downward against the biasing force of the lock biasing means. Between the position where the portion that comes into contact with the fluid damper collides with the fluid damper and the position where the movement of the movable decorative body can be regulated by the lock member is limited. And a driving means for moving. ”

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the front component member that divides the outer periphery of the gaming area where the game is performed, and the gaming area is formed on the front surface. From the transparent flat gaming panel and the rear side of the gaming panel, provided at the center of the front view gaming area so as to be visible from the front through the gaming panel, and the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image, and the effect display means Is also provided on the rear side of the game panel so as to be movable in the vertical direction as a predetermined direction, and a movable decorative body extending in the horizontal direction so as to straddle the effect display means, and a main body portion extending in the vertical direction A restricting portion protruding perpendicularly from an end opposite to the lower end of the main body, a transmission protrusion protruding from the lower end of the main body to the opposite side of the restricting portion, and a lower portion The tip side of the restricting part as you go And a guide part extending obliquely so as to move to the main body part side, and the restricting part abuts the movable decorative body and pivots from the locked position to restrict the movement of the movable decorative body downward. Thus, the restricting portion moves upward and can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth around the lower end portion of the main body portion between the release position where the contact with the movable decorative body is released. And the lower side of the movable decorative body on the rear side of the game panel so that the movable decorative body moving upward from the lower side abuts on the guide portion so as to be rotated from the lock position to the release position. A locking member provided in the vicinity of the moving end on the opposite side, a slide guide provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction on the rear side of the game panel, and capable of coming into contact with the movable decorative body from below, and a game It extends in the vertical direction on the rear side of the panel In addition, it is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is engaged with a release contact portion that can be brought into contact with the slide guide that has moved to the lower moving end, and a locking protrusion and is locked by sliding downward. A transmission slider having a transmission portion for rotating the member from the lock position to the release position; lock urging means for urging the transmission slider in a direction opposite to the lower side; and a rear side of the game panel And a fluid damper that is provided near the moving end on the lower side of the movable decorative body, and that the movable decorative body that has moved downward due to the constantly acting gravity collides and stops the movement of the movable decorative body, and a game A protective stopper that restricts the downward movement of the movable decorative body, and a slide provided at a position where a gap is formed between the movable decorative body and the movable damper when it collides with the fluid damper on the rear side of the panel guide At the position where the transmission slider is slid downward against the urging force of the lock urging means by contacting the release abutting portion of the transmission slider, and the portion that contacts the movable decorative body is the fluid damper. Driving means for moving the movable decorative body from a position below the movable decorative body at the time of the collision to a position where the movement of the movable decorative body can be restricted by the lock member; It is.

  Thereby, in a normal state, the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image in the center of the front view game area is arranged through the transparent game panel in which the game area is formed on the front surface, and the effect display means A movable decorative body is arranged on the upper part of the front-view game area with the game panel, and the movable decorative body decorates the upper part of the game area in the front view. When the slide guide is moved to the lower moving end by the driving means, the slide guide comes into contact with the release contact portion of the transmission slider, and the urging force of the lock urging means that urges the transmission slider upward. On the other hand, by pressing the release contact portion downward, the transmission slide slides downward together with the slide guide. When this transmission slider slides downward, the transmission part slides downward together, so that the downward movement of the transmission part causes the lock to be locked via the transmission projection of the lock member engaged with the transmission part. When the member rotates from the lock position to the release position and the movable decorative body that has been in contact with the restriction portion of the lock member is released from contact with the restriction portion, the gravity that is constantly acting on the movable decorative body is It drops (moves) to the moving end on the lower side so as to traverse the front of the effect display means, and collides with the fluid damper and stops. After the movable decorative body has fallen, if the slide guide is moved to the upper side opposite to the lower side by the driving means, the downward pressing of the release contact portion is released, and the transmission slider is moved to the lock biasing means. Due to the urging force, the lock member slides upward, and the lock member rotates from the release position to the lock position via the transmission protrusion by the slide of the transmission portion of the transmission slider. After that, when the movable decorative body is moved upward via the slide guide that moves upward by the driving means, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the guide portion of the lock member, and the lock member urges the lock through the transmission slider. The movable decorative body can be turned to the release position side against the urging force of the means, and the movable decorative body can move upward to a position beyond the restricting portion of the lock member. When the movable decorative body moves above the lock member, the lock member is rotated to the lock position by the urging force of the lock urging means via the transmission slider, and the movable decorative body is the upper part in the game area in front view. It will return to the normal state which is located in.

  In this manner, when the slide guide is moved to the lower moving end by the drive means and the lock member is moved from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider, a large movable decoration that straddles the effect display means in the left-right direction. Since the body falls (moves) so as to traverse the front side of the effect display means, the movable decoration body moves the movable decoration body to the player by blocking the effect image displayed on the effect display means. Can attract attention to the movable decorative body. Moreover, when a large movable decorative body falls, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the movable decorative body, and the player can be compared with the player. It is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper and stops, the load and inertial force of the movable decorative body can be absorbed by the fluid damper, and the impact on the movable decorative body can be reduced. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the interruption of the game due to the breakage of the movable decorative body, and to make the player enjoy the movable performance and the game by the movable decorative body and to suppress the decrease in the interest Can do.

  Also, the movable decorative body is sized so as to straddle the effect display means, and the weight of the movable decorative body increases so that the movable decorative body acts on the movable decorative body when it is dropped downward due to the constantly acting gravity. However, since the fluid damper is provided near the lower moving end, the movable decorative body with increased weight collides with the fluid damper, so that the impact due to the large inertial force The movable decorative body can be stopped by being sufficiently absorbed by the damper, and the same effect as described above can be obtained without making the large movable decorative body easily damaged.

  In addition, since the movable stopper is provided with a protective stopper that restricts the downward movement of the movable decorative body, the movable decorative body is moved by the fluid damper because the momentum of the movable decorative body is too good or the fluid damper deteriorates. When the movable decorative body abuts against the protective stopper when it cannot be stopped, the movable decorative body can be prevented from moving further downward, so that the movable decorative body collides with another member. Thus, the movable decorative body and other members can be prevented from being damaged, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, even if the fluid damper is deteriorated or damaged, the movable decorative body comes into contact with the protective stopper, so when the movable decorative body comes into contact with the protective stopper, a sound (contact sound) is generated. Therefore, the contact sound can cause the player and the staff of the game hall where the gaming machine is installed to recognize that a malfunction has occurred, and the movable decorative body is damaged. Maintenance can be performed before a serious problem occurs that interrupts the game.

  In addition, since the shock due to the collision of the movable decorative body can be absorbed by the fluid damper, the inertial force when the movable decorative body is dropped downward due to gravity acting constantly by making the movable decorative body larger or heavier. However, even if it becomes larger, it is possible to stop the movable decorative body by sufficiently absorbing the impact caused by the large inertial force by the fluid damper, and it is possible to prevent the large movable decorative body from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make a larger movable ornamental body or a movable ornamental body capable of various movements in which another movable ornamental body is provided together with a driving source that increases the weight. It can be a gaming machine that can be enjoyed.

  Further, when the slide guide is moved by the driving means from the lower side to a position where the portion that contacts the movable decorative body is below the moving end on the lower side of the movable decorative body, the slide guide is released from the transmission slider. Since the transmission slider is slid downward against the urging force of the lock urging means in contact with the portion, the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider. When the movable decorative body is dropped downward by releasing the lock by the lock member, the portion of the slide guide that can come into contact with the movable decorative body is in contact with the movable decorative body than the moving end on the lower side of the movable decorative body. Since it has moved to the lower position, the movable decorative body does not collide with the slide guide even if the dropped movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper. It is possible to prevent the damage.

  Further, the drive means moves the slide guide from a position below the moving end on the lower side of the movable decorative body to a position where the movement of the movable decorative body can be regulated by the lock member at the lock position. Therefore, if the slide guide is moved from the lower side to the movable decorative body positioned below the lock member by the driving means and moved in the vertical direction, the movable decorative body is moved together with the slide guide. The movable decorative body can be arbitrarily moved in the vertical direction. Thereby, in addition to the movable effect that the movable decorative body falls to the lower moving end at once, the movable decorative body moves up and down and vibrates between the lower moving end and the lock member. Therefore, a variety of movable effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the slide guide that moves up and down by the driving means is in contact with the movable decorative body from the lower side, the lock member and the slide guide always act downward. It is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from falling downward due to gravity. In other words, the lock member and the slide guide can be double-locked, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the movable decorative body falls without permission. It is possible to avoid giving a feeling and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider by the movement of the slide guide to the lower moving end, and the movement of the slide guide and the lock member are performed by one driving means. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate drive source such as a solenoid or a drive motor for rotating the lock member, and the load on the control of the movable effect using the movable decorative body is increased. Can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the movable decorative body does not move due to overload, and it is possible to surely perform the movable effect by the movable decorative member, and to give the player a movable effect. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  By the way, since the movable decorative body that moves in the vertical direction is sized so as to straddle the effect display means in the horizontal direction, the movable decorative body is likely to be inclined with respect to the horizontal direction (horizontal). On the other hand, when the movable decorative body is unlocked by the lock member, the lock member restricting portion is locked so as to move to the upper side opposite to the lower side to which the movable decorative body is to move. Since the member is rotated to make it difficult for the movable decorative body to come off the restricting portion, the movable decorative body does not come off from the restricting portion even if the movable decorative body is tilted, and the movable decorative body falls down on its own. This can be prevented. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the movable decorative body from falling on its own, it is possible to avoid causing the player to feel distrust due to the mobile decorative body falling on its own, and the gaming state The movable decorative body can be dropped by releasing the lock at a desired timing according to the above, and the effect of the movable effect using the movable decorative body can be surely exhibited.

  In addition, since the lock member includes the transmission protrusion that protrudes in the direction (left-right direction) intersecting the vertical direction in which the movable decorative body moves, the transmission part of the transmission slider engaged with the transmission protrusion If the transmission protrusion is slid in the vertical direction and the transmission protrusion is pressed in the vertical direction, the lock member can be easily rotated through the transmission protrusion, and it is easy to embody the gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects. it can.

  Further, since the lock member is provided with a guide portion extending obliquely, a separate drive source (drive means) is provided when the movable decorative body is moved upward to return to the original state (normal state). Even if the lock member is not rotated to the release position side, the lock member can be automatically turned to the release position side with the movement of the movable decorative body. Therefore, when the movable decorative body is returned to the normal state, it is not necessary to control the movement of the lock member by the driving means, and the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from being entertained by becoming unstable and deteriorating the interest.

  Furthermore, after the slide guide is moved to the lower moving end by the driving means and the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider, the slide guide is moved from the lower moving end by the driving means. When it is moved upward on the opposite side, the transmission slider slides upward by the lock urging means, and the lock member automatically rotates from the release position to the lock position via the transmission slider. After releasing the movable decorative body by dropping the movable decorative body by moving the guide to the lower moving end, the transmission slider can be operated without providing a separate drive source (drive means) and returning the lock member to the lock position. Via the lock biasing means. Therefore, when the lock member is returned to the lock position (normal state), it is not necessary to control the movement of the lock member by the driving means, so the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced and the movable member can be moved by overload. It is possible to prevent a player from being entertained due to instability in the control of the production and deteriorating the interest.

  In addition, since the movable decorative body is moved downward (dropped) by the constantly acting gravity, the force for moving the movable decorative body to one side in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is always applied. There is no need to provide a mechanism, the configuration relating to the movement of the movable decorative body can be simplified, the configuration relating to the movement can be made compact, and the movable decorative body can be enlarged by the amount of the compact space. It is possible to make the movable decorative body stand out and attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 12,
The gaming machine is
A game area in which a game medium is driven by a player's operation;
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the gaming machine is a gaming area into which gaming media are driven by the player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media, and games to the receiving hall This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  An effect (movable effect) in which the lock by the lock member is released by the driving means and the movable decorative body collides with the fluid damper (movable effect) is executed when the game medium that has been driven into the game area is received at the reception port. Is desirable. As a result, when a game medium is received at the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a movable effect by a movable ornament is executed. Therefore, a game aimed at the entrance by entertaining the player It is possible to make it easy to continue the medium driving, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, a movable effect by a movable decorative body may be executed. Thereby, since the movable effect by the movable decorative body is executed, it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact due to the above-described effects, so that the special lottery result drawn for the player is , It can be considered that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”), and can increase the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and suppress the decrease in interest it can. In addition, as described above, the movable effect by the movable ornament can be executed to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect, so that the player can be informed of the result of the lottery. It can be suitably used for effects (for example, reach effects), and it can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 14: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 12,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of swirl bodies each having a plurality of designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the structure of the means 14, the game machine is each provided with a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by the player operating after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating parts. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, the operational effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  In addition, the effect that the movable decorative body is made to collide with the fluid damper by releasing the lock by the lock member by the driving means (movable effect) is a combination of the symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line. When the above combination is satisfied (so-called reach), a movable effect by a movable ornament may be executed as one of the effects presented to the player. Thereby, by performing the movable effect by the movable decorative body, the player's interest can be attracted strongly, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to become a winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, a movable effect by a movable decorative body may be executed, and by this, a movable effect by a movable decorative body is executed, which has a strong impact on the player. Therefore, when the game is stopped with a specific symbol combination, it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “BB”) that the player has an advantage is generated. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the occurrence and suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the movable effect with a higher effect can be shown to the player by executing the movable effect by the movable decorative body, the effect is to suggest the player the lottery internal lottery. It can be used suitably, and it can entertain a player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 15: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 12,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 15, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  In addition, the effect that the movable decorative body is made to collide with the fluid damper by releasing the lock by the lock member by the driving means (movable effect) is a combination of the symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line. When the above combination is satisfied (so-called reach), a movable effect by a movable decorative body may be executed as one of the effects presented to the player, and the lottery result of the internal lottery When performing the winning combination, a movable effect by the movable decorative body may be executed, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from deteriorating the interest of a player by preventing a movable ornament from being damaged and thereby enjoying a movable effect by the movable ornament. it can.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. In the pachinko machine, it is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which game balls are circulated with the game panel opaque. It is a front view which expands and shows the attacker unit vicinity in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the game panel is made transparent. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nail are shown. It is a front view of the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows the panel board in a game panel, an upper left panel decoration board, and a lower left panel decoration board, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the panel board in the site | part of a specific obstruction nail, (c) It is a fragmentary sectional view of the panel board in the site | part of the obstruction nail which has overlapped with the decoration pattern. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern and obstacle nail in a game panel. (A) is a front view which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern in the panel board of a game panel, and the back front decoration board of the back front effect unit in a back unit, (b) is the panel decoration LED of a panel board and a panel decoration board It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center role object and front effect unit of the front unit of a game board, and was seen from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 1st pattern in the table | surface production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 2nd pattern in the table | surface production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the back unit of a game board which emphasizes and shows a back front decoration board and a back front right decoration board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back direction production unit in a back unit from the front. It is a front view of a back back direction production unit which emphasizes a back back movable mechanism in a normal position with a back back movable decoration object. It is a front view of the back back direction production | presentation unit which shows the state by which the back back movable decoration body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to the vicinity of the descending end. FIG. 136 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135 and the back and back movable decorative body is dropped. It is a front view of a back back direction production | generation unit which shows the state which is moving the back back movable decoration body to an up-down direction with a slide guide. It is a front view of the back back direction production | generation unit which shows the state which the lock member is rotating from the lock position to the cancellation | release position side by the upward movement of the back back movable decoration body by a slide guide. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear back decoration production unit in the back rear production unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a rear view of the back decoration production unit in the back rear production unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 5th pattern in the back decoration production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 6th pattern in the back back decoration production | presentation unit. (A) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the back middle production unit of the back unit for every main member, and (b) exploded the back middle production unit of the back unit for every main member. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 3rd pattern in the inside production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 4th pattern in the inside production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the back right production unit in a back unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back right production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right production unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is a front view of the back right production unit which emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in the normal state where the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 147; FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state where the bearing slider is positioned at the descending end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 148; 149 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state where the bearing slider is positioned at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149. FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back and back movable decorative body of the back and back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position. FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the rear back movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to the lowered position; FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back and rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between the standby position and the lowered position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body of the back right production unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the back right movable decoration body from the state of FIG. 154 to the 2nd state. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 155 to the first state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back movable decorative body of the back top production unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom production unit in the back unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back rear movable decorative body of the back rear production unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, the back right movable decorative body of the back right production unit is moved to the second state, the back movable movable body of the back upper production unit is moved to the appearance position, and It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom production unit is moved to the raised position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. It is a game board front view shown in the state which made the 3rd pattern light-emit on the back first light-guide plate of a back middle production | presentation unit. It is a game board front view shown in the state which made the 4th pattern light emission decoration in the back first light-guide plate of a back middle production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 5th pattern was light-decorated on the back 2nd light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in a back back production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 6th pattern was light-decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in the back back production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission effect of the animation style by the multiple pattern using a front light-guide plate, a back 1st light-guide plate, and a back 2nd light-guide plate. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which made the 1st design light-emit on the front light guide plate of a front production unit, and moved the back right movable decoration body of a back right production unit to the 2nd state. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 Control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy driving the handle 182.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the front effect unit 2600 and the rear effect. The unit 3100, the back middle production unit 3200, the back right production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, the back lower production unit 3500, the back front production unit 3600, etc. are allowed to perform a movable production and a light production production, etc. Can entertain.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front after disassembly. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is placed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101 and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 168) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b, and inclined portions 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the leading end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed in which the illegal string is manipulated to allow the illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port, etc. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part of the game, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full sphere receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and communicates with a full tank guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 is provided. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released to the lower plate 202 side from the ball discharge port 150d, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4 A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The handle return spring 190 is urged, and one end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached to the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorated board 278, the dish lower left decorated board 283, and the dish lower right decorated board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the top bowl and unit after removing the top bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the left and right center in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with its upper and rear opened.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the elevating base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted through the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the substrate box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward most, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front and rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 for lighting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b is turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  The upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4 the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward to the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and in the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front face of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the rear. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base unit 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state where the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball discharge passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will soon flow down.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 has a box-like upper full base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and opened at the rear side, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full base 601 and opened at the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to contact the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full discharge passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150 By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Are discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank pass unit 610, and is filled with a full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball removal movable piece 592 It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 in front view. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  A body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses a sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front side. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose plan view extends in the left-right direction, and is inclined from the bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view, and the front wall and the rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  In addition, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature at the downstream side than at the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical spot can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game by the interruption of the game can be enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of this can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from the lower side to the rear side from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically, from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end thereof is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end that is inclined so that the circulation direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 on the downstream side of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can be grasped at the tip of the electric wiring by opening the grip portion by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lowered as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step 501n and the right step 501o are inclined such that the rear right corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball grind) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the direction of the pressure applied to the game ball B can be prevented, so that the game balls B can be prevented from being pressed against each other, and the game ball B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 from the overflow surface portion 501m is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to the inclination thereof, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4 to cause a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed with the game panel made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board. FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the left front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the decoration pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nails.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start port 2004, and a prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. As described above, the game is performed to entertain the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 108) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 97, FIG. 168, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 113) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to a command from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 that drives the decorative board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 that houses the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 The prize winning hole 2005 that allows the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, and the game balls accepted in the prize winning hole 2005 are distributed. You A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 for receiving the game ball receiving space 2006 either, a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 and the start opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a are attached to the right side of the front view. 2005, attacker unit 240 having receiving space 2006, first receiving port 2007, and second receiving port 2008 And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is mounted slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 is closed. As shown, a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear of the back box 3010, a back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3100, and a back middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the lower front part of the back middle effect unit 3200. A back bottom effect unit 3500, a back right effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, and a back front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back bottom effect unit 3500 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. 116 is a front view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a front view of the front component member and the game panel from the rear. FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as seen from the front, and FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as seen from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1010 coincides with a notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. Yes.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a front view showing a panel board, an upper left panel decorative board, and a lower left panel decorative board in a game panel, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at a specific obstacle nail. ) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the site of the obstacle nail overlapping the decorative pattern. FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the panel board of the gaming panel and the front decorative board of the front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is the panel decoration of the panel board and the panel decorative board. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship with LED for operation.

  The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In addition, the gaming panel 1100 includes a panel decoration board 1130 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are mounted, and a board on which the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120 And a cover 1135. The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. The substrate cover 1135 includes an upper left substrate cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left substrate cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed in a thin plate thickness by being spaced apart in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole penetrating front and rear and a short long hole, and an upper edge and a lower edge, respectively. A plurality of engaging step portions 1114. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engagement claws 1125 and the engagement pieces 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

  As shown in FIG. 121A and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The ball B has a wide width that allows the balls B to be arranged, and the upper and right sides have a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged. In the present embodiment, in the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), a portion having a large width is used as the decoration pattern forming region 1101, and a portion having a small width is enclosed. A decoration pattern non-formation region 1102 is set.

  This panel board 1110 is provided with a decoration pattern 1150 in which a predetermined pattern is formed by a plurality of linear grooves in a decoration pattern forming area 1101 on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment is a pattern such as a crack in the glass. The decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decoration pattern 1150 can be seen from the player side ahead even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not emitting light, and decorates the game area 5a. In addition, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light and the light is incident on the inside of the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 causes the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a pattern such as a crack to emit light. Can do.

  The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 includes a radiating portion 1151 that mainly reflects light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the inside, and light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the inside. And a radiation light guide 1152 that reflects and guides light along a linear shape. The radiation light guiding unit 1152 satisfies at least one of the depth of the groove and the long circumferential length in the cross section as compared with the radiation unit 1151. The radiation light guide unit 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) the plurality of radiation units 1151, and diffusely reflects the light irradiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 within the panel plate 1110. The light can be guided in the extending direction of the groove. That is, the radiation light guide unit 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiation units 1151 connected to itself to the other. Within the limited range, the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 (the ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) is increased. More specifically, the radiation light guide unit 1152 is normally connected from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 121 (a). Light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the light guide region 1103 to cause the radiating portion 1151 to emit light, and the overall photosensitivity of the decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

  As a result, the radiation light guide unit 1152 has more radiation parts 1151 than the radiation part 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a part where light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (usually a part outside the light guide region 1103). Light can reach and the radiating portion 1151 can be decorated with a sufficient amount of light. Accordingly, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152, and has a pattern such as a crack. The decoration pattern 1150 thus formed can be decorated with light emission with uniform brightness over substantially the whole.

  The panel board 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N has a specific obstacle nail N1 that has an important role for the game. As shown in FIG. 122, the specific obstacle nail N1 is disposed in the vicinity of the warp inlet 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, and the gate portion 2003. Since these specific obstacle nails N1 are distorted or bent when the game ball B comes into contact with each other, the probability that the game ball B will be received into the warp entrance 2501, the general winning port 2001, or the like changes. This is a subject that is always subject to maintenance so that there is no distortion or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 (b) and FIG. 122, a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) is defined as a decoration prohibition area 1104 with the specific obstacle nail N1 as the center. The radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 of the decoration pattern 1150 are not formed inside. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the grooves of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 are not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1140 around the specific obstacle nail N1, it is necessary to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 during maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is struck, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiating portion 1151 and the radiation light guiding portion 1152, and the panel plate 1110 can be prevented from being cracked or cracked.

  Moreover, the obstacle nail N planted in the part overlapping the decoration pattern 1150 among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1 is implanted in the panel plate 1110 as shown in FIG. 121 (c). The projected tip protrudes into the groove (radiation light guide 1152 in the figure) constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light and light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, light is irradiated from the groove of the decoration pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding into the groove. Then, the light is reflected at the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be shined. Thereby, the obstacle nail N can be made to shine, and the player can show the player a light emitting effect that has not been available in conventional pachinko machines. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted in a special part, and thereby, together with the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. The special nail N in the special part can be illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special nail N in the special part, and the game ball B can be driven into the special nail N. The operation can be performed.

  In addition, the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is such that a part of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152 formed in the linear groove is in the back unit 3000 described later, as shown in FIG. It is formed so as to be along the inner outer edge facing the center side of the front front decorative board 3603 front view game area 5a of the front front effect unit 3600. Accordingly, when the decoration pattern 1150 (the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152) is caused to emit light by the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the outer edge inside the back decorative substrate 3603 is viewed from the player side. Can be decorated with luminescence. In addition, this allows the outer edge of the front decorative board 3603 to be illuminated and decorated in front view, so that the front decorative board 3603 can be made relatively dark and difficult to see. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 including linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. The decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cutting waste discharged by the formation of the decoration pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be planted in a good state.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1123 that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion 1123 is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. A through-hole 1121 is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion 1123 and is disposed outside the holding step portion 1123 and a plurality of protruding pins 1124 into which the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted. Three engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a panel protruding from the lower outer side of the holding step portion 1123 upward. A pair of engagement pieces 1126 respectively engaged with two engagement step portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece 1126 from the diagonally upper front side, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper and lower left sides. By engaging the engaging step portion 1114 at the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125 elastically, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state of being accommodated in the holding step portion 1123. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel holder 1120 has two substrate mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear at the upper left corner and the upper right corner when viewed from the front outside the holding step portion 1123, and the rear side of each substrate mounting recess 1127. And two connecting recesses 1128 that are recessed forward. An upper left substrate cover 1136 to which an upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is attached and a lower left substrate cover 1137 to which a lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 is attached are attached to the two substrate attachment recesses 1127 from the front. The upper substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. In addition, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate sticking portion 1012 in the front component member 1000. In the lower substrate mounting recess 1127, an engaging claw 1125 that engages with an engaging step portion 1114 at a lower left oblique portion of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the boundary side with the holding step portion 1123.

  In the connection recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connection connector 1131 a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 attached to the board attachment recess 1127 and the connection connector 1132 a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 pass through the rear wall of the board attachment recess 1127. Thus, the space is formed in such a size that a sufficiently large space is formed so that a finger can be inserted around the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b. Thereby, the connection cable (illustration abbreviation is omitted) and connection work to the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b can be easily performed.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal portion of the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side facing right and the lowermost side facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and is mounted so as to irradiate light downward to the right so that the remainder is perpendicular to the upper left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a connection connector 1131a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The lower left panel decoration board 1132 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The lower left panel decoration board 1132 is cut away so as to avoid the lower locking claws 1125 in the panel holder 1120, and the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are arranged on the upper and right sides while avoiding the cutout portion. On the other hand, it is mounted so as to emit light toward the upper right. The lower left panel decorative board 1132 has a connection connector 1132a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as not to stand out from the front. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can irradiate light forward.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged such that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side view type panel decoration LED 1130 a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Yes. Thereby, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the panel decoration board 1130 can be made thinner than the panel board 1110, the panel decoration board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100). The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be decorated with light emission while suppressing an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110 and is too large for the size of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). The plate surface. In other words, the panel decoration board 1130 has another area (excess area) in which the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted are not mounted. Area). Thereby, the attachment strength of the panel decoration board 1130 can be increased, and even if the vibration or impact generated during the transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 is applied, the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel board 1110 It is possible to make it difficult to cause the positional relationship deviation, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a and to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110.

  Further, since the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transport, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are possible. However, it is difficult to be transmitted to the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, vibrations and the like acting on the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) can be reduced, and a decrease in the durability of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be suppressed. And the panel board 1110 can be prevented from being misaligned, and the optical axis misalignment of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be suppressed to prevent the incident of light on the panel board 1110. .

  A panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1135. The board cover 1135 is formed in a frosted glass-like translucent so that the panel decoration board 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so that light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be diffused. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to reduce that the light irradiated (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player and makes the player feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment has a cracked decorative pattern 1150 formed in a decorative pattern forming region 1101 of a transparent panel board 1110, which is more transparent and three-dimensional than a conventional decoration using a printed sheet. You can show the player a certain decoration. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is caused to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated, and the game ball B in the game area 5a that has not been seen in a conventional pachinko machine can be obtained. It is possible to show the player the light emitting decorations in the distribution area.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed only in the decoration pattern formation area 1101 in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate through various flow paths, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed throughout the game area 5a. Compared with the case where it forms, the cost concerning formation of the decoration pattern 1150 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment has the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is caused to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. The player can illuminate from behind, and can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit) that is not in the conventional pachinko machine is decorated with light emission.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is disposed behind the certificate sticking part 1012. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is caused to emit light, the card sticking part 1012 is caused to emit light. The attached sticker (not shown) can be illuminated from behind, and the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which a sticker that is not in a conventional pachinko machine is illuminated.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment, a condensing lens, a diffusing lens, or the like is not disposed between the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is directly radiated to the side surface of the panel plate 1110 in a wide range, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110. It can be decorated with beautiful luminous.

  Furthermore, the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decoration board 1130 (LED for panel decoration 1130a) on the panel holder 1120 for light-decorating the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, when changing to a panel board 1110 with other different decoration patterns, it can be handled by simply replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component member 1000, the panel decoration substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel board 1110 are separately provided. I try to install it. Thereby, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 are removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 to which the decoration pattern 1150 is not applied. 1120 and the front component member 1000 can be a common part. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 not provided with a decorative pattern 1150, a dummy substrate cover 1135 may be attached to the substrate attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. The substrate cover 1135 and the panel decoration substrate 1130 may be used while attached.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 168) that controls game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a big prize port sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2404, a second receiving port sensor 2405, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker. A solenoid 2414, a V winning opening solenoid 2416, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first start opening sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail, but the two shins display a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 has a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 168) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 projecting outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107, FIG. 108, FIG. 112, FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning holes 2001, and the side slope is attached along the inner rail 1002 in the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 and a general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, which are attached to the right side of the front port of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 having a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2008; A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the upper side of the game area 5a and slightly above the center in front of the moving mouth unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 And a table effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the gaming area 5a near the lower end at the center in the left-right direction and immediately above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. The start port unit 2100 is formed so that a portion excluding the front surface of the first start port 2002 is transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning port 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start port 2002 is a center described later. It is located immediately below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the front front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is detected by a first start port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side in the left-right direction is Is open upward at a position higher than the general prize opening 2001, and the leftmost general prize opening 2001 is opened at a position higher than the intermediate general prize opening 2001 toward the upper left in the front view. Yes.

  The side unit 2200 is formed so that the portions other than the front surfaces of the three general winning ports 2001 are transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized. By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning holes 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the front front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 are detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8c. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left area of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The entire side slope 2300 is transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001 of four general winning ports 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2007. A receiving port 2008 is provided (see FIG. 108 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape in a front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which the game ball B flows (passes) vertically is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. Has been. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always open obliquely to the lower right at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 having a predetermined size in which the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 circulates is disposed below the special winning opening 2005. The attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward in the receiving space 2006, and is always open upward on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. Two receiving ports 2008 are arranged.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball B, and the gate portion 2003 penetrates vertically with a size slightly larger than the game ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second start opening 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens forward, and the big winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a grand prize opening 2005. A big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a first reception sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received in the first reception port 2007, and a game ball received in the second reception port 2008 And a second receiving port sensor 2405 for detecting B (see FIG. 168).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start port door 2411 that can open and close the second start port 2004, and opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate part 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result and the first receiving port 2007 are opened and closed (the first game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 and circulating in the receiving space 2006 is first The V winning opening door 2415 and the V winning opening door 2415 are divided into either the first receiving opening 2002 or the second receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. A first special lottery result or the second special lottery V winning hole solenoid 2416 to open and close depending on the result is the lottery by accepting game balls B to Doguchi 2004, and a.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and has a gate portion 2003 and a second start port 2004 at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and a gate passage 2421 through which the game ball B can flow. The left side passage 2422 that extends up and down below the second start port 2004 on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and through which the game ball B can flow, and the second start port 2004 after extending up and down on the right side of the gate portion 2003. Above the right side passage 2423 through which the game ball B can be circulated and below the gate passage 2421 and the left side passage 2422 and above the winning prize opening 2005. An attacker passage 24 that extends from the lower side of the gate passage 2421 to the left so that the left end side is lowered and through which the game ball B can flow. 4, the left side from the left end of the winning opening 2005 and a, and the discharge ledge 2425 extends leftward to be lower.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the gate passage 2421 is connected to a portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball B can pass through the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423. Yes. Accordingly, the game ball B that has entered the gate passage 2421 from above passes through the gate portion 2003 and then flows down to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second starting port 2004. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side passage 2422 from above passes through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 to the attacker passage 2424, and after passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003. There is a pattern that bends to the right, enters the gate passage 2421, passes through the front of the second starting port 2004, and flows down to the attacker passage 2424. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right side passage 2423 from above passes through the right side of the gate portion 2003, then bends to the left, enters the gate passage 2421, passes through the front of the second start port 2004, and the attacker passage. It flows down to 2424. If the second start port 2004 is opened when the game ball B passes in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004.

  The second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 opened forward from the front, and can rotate around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second start port door 2411 rotates (turns) so that the upper side moves forward by driving the start port solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second start port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. The game ball B flowing down to the front of the second start port 2004 can be guided to the second start port 2004 side and received in the second start port 2004. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (when energizing). Let me.

  The grand prize opening door 2413 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the big prize opening 2005 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. It is possible. The grand prize opening door 2413 closes the grand prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and can deliver the game ball B that has circulated through the attacker passage 2424 to the left side after being guided to the left. . The special prize opening door 2413 is retracted by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special prize opening 2005, and after passing through any one of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, the attacker The game ball B that has circulated through the passage 2424 can be received in the special prize opening 2005. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  The V prize opening door 2415 is formed in a plate shape extending in the front-rear direction in the receiving space 2006 and extending right and left so that the right end is lowered, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) is openable and closable. The V winning opening door 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving opening 2007, guides the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 to the right, and is always opened upward. It can be received at the entrance 2008. Further, the V winning opening door 2415 is moved backward by the driving of the V winning opening solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving opening 2007, and the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is first received with high probability. It can be received at the entrance 2007. The V winning opening door 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the V winning port solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and the first receiving port when the V winning port solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). 2007 is opened. In other words, the V winning opening door 2415 can distribute the game balls B received in the big winning opening 2005 so as to be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  In the state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2421 is positioned below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 described later (slightly to the left of directly below). In addition, the gate portion 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the general winning opening 2001 is located at substantially the same height as the first start opening 2002. Further, in the state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (gate portion 2003).

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate unit 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, even if the game ball B is released from the stage 2503, the gate unit 2003 Never go through. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide path 2510) of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510, a left side passage 2422, a gate passage 2421, and a right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is any of them. You will enter the crab.

  Then, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 immediately below it. At this time, if the second starter door 2411 rotates forward and is in the open position, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starter door 2411 and The second starting port 2004 is guided to the second starting port 2004 and received. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result (the normal lottery result is “normal hit” when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 (the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2401). The game ball B itself having the lottery “normal hit” is set to the second start port 2004 by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second start port door 2411, and the like. Can also be accepted.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  The gate passage 2421 communicates with the downstream end of the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004. Therefore, the gate passage 2421 is connected to the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the gate portion 2003. The entered game ball B is allowed to flow to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate part 2003. Therefore, in a state where the second start port 2411 has moved to the open position and the second start port 2004 is ready to be received, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game that has circulated through the right side passage 2423. The sphere B can be received into the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. The gate passage 2421 is connected to the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003 because the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 communicates with the middle of the left side passage 2422. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has entered may be received in the second starting port 2004.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second start port 2004, the game ball is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2424.

  The game ball B discharged to the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the inclination, and is released downward from the left end of the discharge shelf 2425 through the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005. Is done. At this time, if the big prize opening door 2413 closing the big prize opening 2005 is retreated and the big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B released into the attacker passage 2424 has a high probability. Accepted in mouth 2005. The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and then sent to the receiving space 2006, and either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 by the V winning port door 2415. It is distributed to crab.

  The game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2404 or the second receiving port sensor 2405, and is moved downward (substrate) It is discharged onto the holder 1200).

  There is a possibility that the game ball B released downward from the release shelf 2425 is received by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the guide path of the front front effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls that have not been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the gaming area 5a and are discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc., and is located slightly above the center of the front view. It is attached to the front surface of 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5 a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be released. A warp outlet 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110), a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that a portion (top) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and a portion (valley) that is the lowest on both left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Thus, the game ball B can be released from these parts into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (top) of the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage 2510 that guides the game ball B that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front to the left and then releases the game ball B downward. The right guide passage 2510 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly on the right side of the attacker unit 2400 immediately above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Yes.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 in the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. Accordingly, when the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls B that circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are in the right guide passage. Enter 2510 and be guided. As a result, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center object 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B is passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. In addition, the game ball B can be received into the big winning opening 2005 that is opened (open) with a high probability.

[5-8f. Table production unit]
Next, the table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126 and the like. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the center unit and the front effect unit of the front unit of the game board, as viewed from the front. 125 is a front view showing a state where the first design is light-decorated in the front effect unit, and FIG. 126 is a front view showing a state where the second design is light-decorated in the table effect unit.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and is directed toward the right side surface of the front light guide plate 2610 and a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and light can be irradiated toward the first pattern substrate 2611 attached to the rear side of the center object 2500 and the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a are mounted, and a second pattern substrate 2612 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 is provided.

  The front light guide plate 2610 has a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 125) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex first reflecting portions that reflect only light from the vertical direction forward, and only light from the left and right directions. And a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex second reflecting portions that reflect forward. That is, the front effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern 2621 to emit light when the LED for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 emits light by 2611a, and emit light from the LED 2612a for the light guide plate of the second pattern substrate 2612. Then, the second pattern 2622 can be displayed in a light emitting manner.

  The front light guide plate 2610 has fine irregularities in each of the innumerable first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2621 and the innumerable second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 2622. In the state where the light guide plate LED 2611a of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2612a of the second pattern substrate 2612 are not emitting light, various types of the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side appear transparent. The effect image displayed on the decorative body and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the first pattern 2621 is a pattern imitating the surroundings of one eye of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which radial and concentric cracks enter the glass, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are full-color LEDs.

  In the front effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment, the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 have their plate surfaces parallel to the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610, and their plate thicknesses. Is arranged in a direction parallel to the surface of the front light guide plate 2610, so that the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are difficult to see when viewed from the front (player side). It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. FIG. 127 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, with the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board highlighted. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the back unit is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the back unit is disassembled and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear of the back box 3010, a back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3100, and a back middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the lower front part of the back middle effect unit 3200. A back bottom effect unit 3500, a back right effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, and a back front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back bottom effect unit 3500 are provided.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b A notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

[5-9a. Backward production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141 and the like. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 133 is a front view of the back rear effect unit in which the back back movable decorative body highlights the back back movable mechanism at the normal position. FIG. 134 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing the state in which the back and back movable decorative body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to the vicinity of the descending end. FIG. 136 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state in which the back and rear movable decorative body is dropped by rotating the lock member to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135. FIG. 137 is a front view of the back and back effect unit showing a state in which the back and back movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction by the slide guide. FIG. 138 is a front view of the back rear effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side by the upward movement of the back back movable decorative body by the slide guide.

  FIG. 139 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear back decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is a rear view of the back decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit. FIG. 140 is a front view showing a state in which the fifth pattern is light-decorated in the back decoration effect unit, and FIG. 141 is a front view showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-decorated in the back decoration effect unit.

  The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part in the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The rear rear effect unit 3100 is attached to the rear rear movable effect unit 3110 having a rectangular outer shape and a frame shape, and the rear rear effect unit 3110 attached to the rear box 3010 and the rear rear movable effect unit 3110. A decoration production unit 3150.

  First, the back rear movable effect unit 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The rear rear movable effect unit 3110 extends in the left-right direction with substantially the same length as the full width in the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600, and is formed in a shape imitating an item as an item in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back and back movable decorative body 3120 and the back and back movable decorative body 3130 that attaches the back and back movable decorative body 3120 so as to be movable in the vertical direction are provided.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3120 extends in the left-right direction, protrudes outward from the left and right ends of the decorative body main body 3121 simulating the nata, and a pair of back rear movable mechanisms 3130 described later. A left slider 3122 and a right slider 3123 that are slidably attached to the slide shaft 3132 in the vertical direction are provided. Further, although not shown, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is attached to the rear side of the decorative body main body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) are mounted on the front and rear surfaces. Before diffusing light from the LED, which is attached between the substrate, the back movable decorative body decorative substrate, and the decorative body main body 3121 and is attached to the front surface of the back movable decorative body decorative substrate A lens and a part of the lower part of the decorative body main body 3121 that is attached to the rear side of the decorative body for the back movable decorative body and guides light from the LED that is attached to the rear surface of the decorative body for the back movable decorative body. And a rear lens for irradiating from the rear to the front.

  The decorative body 3121 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is formed in a shape resembling nata, and the left end side is the front end of the nata in the front view and the lower side is the nata blade. The decorative body main body 3121 is formed so that the part imitating the blade of the nut is transparent. In addition, the decorative body 3121 is formed with a crack-patterned decoration that spreads radially and concentrically around a portion near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction.

  The left slider 3122 protrudes forward from the front surface, and includes a lock protrusion 3122a that can come into contact with a restriction portion 3141c and a guide portion 3141d of a lock member 3141 of a back-and-back movable mechanism 3130 described later. Although not shown, the left slider 3122 includes a pair of sliding bushes that are spaced apart vertically and into which the slide shaft 3132 on the left side of the rear back movable mechanism 3130 is slidably inserted. The sliding bush has a plurality of bearing steel balls in contact with the slide shaft 3132 inside, and can slide smoothly with respect to the inserted slide shaft 3132 without rattling. The left slider 3122 can smoothly move the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 in the vertical direction only on the left side by a pair of sliding bushes. The left slider 3122 includes a detection piece that protrudes rearward, although not shown. The detection piece of the left slider 3122 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back decorative effect production unit 3150.

  The right slider 3123 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the decorative body main body 3121 in the vertical direction, and has a rectangular cross section that sandwiches the right slide shaft 3132 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 from the left and right. Is formed.

  The back movable decorative body decorative board is attached above the portion of the decorative body main body 3121 that imitates the blade of the nata. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable decorative body decoration board are concentrically arranged around the lower side of the center in the left-right direction, and each of them is radially outward from the center. It is attached in the direction in which light is irradiated. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back movable ornament decorative board are arranged along the lower side and the right side of the rear view, and are parallel to the rear surface of the back movable decorative body decorative substrate. It is attached so that light is irradiated toward the side.

  The back movable decorative body 3120 can visually recognize the back through a portion that imitates the blade of the decorative body 3121. Further, when the back movable ornament 3120 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable ornament decoration board, a crack pattern decoration is formed on the front surface of the ornament body 3121 via the front lens. The illuminated portion can be decorated with light emission, and when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface are caused to emit light, the front end of the decorative body 3121 and the blade portion can be decorated with light emission via the rear lens. .

  The back rear movable mechanism 3130 in the back rear movable production unit 3110 of the back rear production unit 3100 is formed of a metal plate and has a rectangular outer shape and a frame-like unit frame 3131, and extends vertically and is separated in the left-right direction. The pair of slide shafts 3132 are respectively attached to the unit frame 3131 and extend in parallel up and down on the left side of the left slide shaft 3132 in a front view, and a spiral groove is formed on the outer periphery. A spiral shaft 3133 that is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131, a slide guide 3134 that is screwed into the spiral shaft 3133 and that can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the back movable decorative body 3120, and a rotation shaft that is positioned upward. Toward the bottom left corner of the unit frame 3131 A rear rear drive motor 3135, a spur gear-like motor gear (not shown) attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear drive motor 3135, and meshed with the motor gear and attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3133. And a spur gear-like drive gear (not shown).

  Further, the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 includes a lock member 3141 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a slightly lower portion from the upper left corner of the unit frame 3131 when viewed from the front, and extends vertically and is unit frame. A transmission slider 3142 for rotating the lock member 3141, a lock spring 3143 biasing the transmission slider 3142 upward, and a unit frame 3131 above the lock member 3141. And a rotation restricting member 3144 that restricts the rotation of the lock member 3141.

  Further, the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 is attached to the unit frame 3131 and has a rear rear drive motor 3135 attached to the lower surface thereof, and a box-shaped gear box 3145 in which the motor gear and the drive gear are housed. A damper 3146 attached to the gear box 3145 upward and a protective stopper 3147 projecting upward from the gear box 3145 so as to surround the outer periphery of the damper 3146 are provided.

  The unit frame 3131 is formed in a frame shape by four band-plate-like members constituting each side. The unit frame 3131 has a vertical height that is substantially the same as the height in the back box 3010, and a left and right length that is substantially the same as the left and right width in the back box 3010. The pair of slide shafts 3132 are columnar metal shafts that extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the unit frame 3131. Each of the pair of slide shafts 3132 has an upper end and a lower end attached to the unit frame 3131.

  The spiral shaft 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131 at both upper and lower ends on the left side of the left slide shaft 3132. The spiral shaft 3133 is made of metal.

  The slide guide 3134 includes a guide main body 3134a to which the spiral shaft 3133 is screwed, and a guide protrusion 3134b that protrudes from the guide main body 3134a to the right in front view and can come into contact with the lower surface of the back movable decorative body 3120. I have. Although not shown, the slide guide 3134 is recessed from the front end surface of the guide projection 3134b to the left in front view and penetrates vertically, and from the guide body 3134a into which the left slide shaft 3132 is inserted. And a detection piece protruding rearward.

  The slide guide 3134 is prevented from rotating around the axis of the spiral shaft 3133 when the slide shaft 3132 is inserted into the guide groove at the tip of the guide protrusion 3134b, and the slide guide 3134 depends on the direction of rotation of the spiral shaft 3133. Can be moved upward or downward. The slide guide 3134 is configured such that the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b. The detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by a plurality (two) of slide detection sensors 3155 provided in the back decoration effect unit 3150.

  The lock member 3141 includes a main body portion 3141a extending vertically, a bearing hole 3141b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a base end portion that is a lower portion of the main body portion 3141a, and a right angle from a distal end portion that is an upper portion of the main body portion 3141a. A planar regulating portion 3141c protruding rightward in front view and facing upward, a guide portion 3141d extending obliquely from the distal end of the regulating portion 3141c toward the vicinity of the base end portion of the body portion 3141a, and the body portion A stopper 3141e protruding upward from the upper end surface of 3141a, a transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a, and a transmission protrusion 3141f penetrating in the front-rear direction and transmitted And a transmission long hole 3141g extending in the direction in which the protrusion 3141f protrudes.

  A shaft pin (not shown) of the unit frame 3131 is inserted into the bearing hole 3141b of the lock member 3141. As a result, the lock member 3141 is attached so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction. The restricting portion 3141c is configured such that the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable ornament 3120 can abut from above. In the guide portion 3141d, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 can be contacted from below. A surface of the stopper 3141e facing rightward in front view can be brought into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. The transmission long hole 3141g is inserted so that the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 is slidable.

  The transmission slider 3142 is formed of a metal strip extending vertically, and is formed slightly shorter than the height within the frame of the unit frame 3131. The transmission slider 3142 is attached to a part constituting the left side of the unit frame 3131 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The transmission slider 3142 protrudes in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the upper end, is formed with a cylindrical transmission pin 3142 a that is slidably inserted into the transmission elongated hole 3141 g of the lock member 3141, and a guide protrusion of the slide guide 3134 formed at the lower end. And a release contact portion 3142b that can come into contact with 3134b, and a locking portion 3142c that is formed at the upper end and is engaged with the lower end of the lock spring 3143. The release contact portion 3142 b of the transmission slider 3142 is located below the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

  The lock spring 3143 is a coil spring. The upper end of the lock spring 3143 is locked to the upper end of the portion constituting the left side of the unit frame 3131, and the lower end is locked to the locking portion 3142 c of the transmission slider 3142. The lock spring 3143 urges the transmission slider 3142 upward.

  The damper 3146 has a cylindrical damper body 3146a attached to the gear box 3145, a piston rod 3146b extending upward from the damper body 3146a, and a cylinder attached to the tip (upper end) of the piston rod 3146b. A contact receiving portion 3146c. Although not shown, the damper main body 3146a of the damper 3146 has a cylindrical space extending in the vertical direction (axial direction), and can slide in the vertical direction (axial direction) in the space. A piston, a spring urging the piston upward, and a viscous fluid filled in the space inside, and a piston rod 3146b extends outward from the piston.

  The damper 3146 is configured such that the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 can come into contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c at the upper end from above. The damper 3146 has an elastic force generated by a spring when the piston inside the damper main body 3146a moves downward via the piston rod 3146b by the back rear movable decorative body 3120 coming into contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c from above. The impact can be absorbed by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid. When the back movable decorative body 3120 is not in contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c (free state), the damper 3146 has the upper surface of the contact receiving portion 3146c positioned above the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147. Yes.

  Next, the operation of the back movable movable effect unit 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 133, the back rear movable effect unit 3110 is in the state of the retracted position in which the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the highest position, and the lock member 3141 is viewed from the front. In FIG. 5, the lock position is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction. In this state, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 is more than the restriction portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. Located above.

  Further, in a normal state, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back rear movable decoration body 3120 is detected by the decoration body detection sensor 3154 of the back back decoration production unit 3150, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected on the back side. This is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 in the rear decoration effect unit 3150.

  In the lock member 3141 in the locked position, the main body 3141a is vertical, and the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a is horizontal. In addition, the lock member 3141 has a restricting portion 3141c protruding rightward from the upper end of the main body portion 3141a, located directly below the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120, and a stopper 3141e protruding upward. Is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. The lock member 3141 is restricted from turning in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, since the stopper 3141e is in contact with the turning restriction member 3144.

  Since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 abuts against the rotation restricting member 3144, the rotation in the direction in which the transmission protrusion 3141f moves upward is restricted, and therefore the transmission length formed on the transmission protrusion 3141f. The transmission pin 3142a inserted into the hole 3141g does not move further upward. Accordingly, the transmission slider 3142 biased upward by the lock spring 3143 is restricted from further movement upward by the lock member 3141 at the lock position via the transmission pin 3142a.

  In this normal state, the slide guide 3134 regulates the downward movement (falling) of the back movable ornament 3120. In this state, if the slide guide 3134 moves down to some extent for some reason such as malfunction, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 Since it abuts on 3141c, it is possible to restrict the downward movement (falling) of the lock member 3141 (the restricting portion 3141c). That is, in the normal state, the back-side movable decorative body 3120 is prevented from falling by the two of the slide guide 3134 and the lock member 3141.

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide body 3134a screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 The slide guide 3134 moves downward. By moving the slide guide 3134 downward, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 that is in contact with the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves downward together with the slide guide 3134.

  When the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 moving downward together with the slide guide 3134 comes into contact with the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved downward. As a result of the restriction, the movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 stops and enters the standby position (see FIG. 134). In this standby position state, the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is positioned below the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back and back decoration effect unit 3150, and is in a non-detection state. On the other hand, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is still being detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back rear decoration rendering unit 3150. Although illustration is omitted, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 is moved up and down so that the decorative movable body 3120 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back rear decorative rendering unit 3150 between the retracted position and the standby position. It extends to.

  Thereafter, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is separated from the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back back movable decorative body 3120, and the back back movable decorative body 3120 is moved. Only the slide guide 3134 moves downward while keeping the standby position (see FIG. 135).

  In this state, the load of the back movable decorative body 3120 acts on the restricting portion 3141c protruding to the right of the lock member 3141. Therefore, the load applied to the restricting portion 3141c causes the lock member 3141 to move to the bearing hole 3141b. It tries to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. However, since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 from the left, the clockwise rotation is restricted, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120 is restricted. Does not deviate from the restriction portion 3141c.

  When the lower surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving downward contacts the upper surface of the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 (see FIG. 135), the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 It is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the lower side of the rear decoration effect unit 3150. In this state, the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134 b of the slide guide 3134 is lower than the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

  From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward via the spiral shaft 3133 by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 presses the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward. The transmission slider 3142 slides downward against the urging force of the lock spring 3143.

  When the transmission slider 3142 slides downward, the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 also moves downward, so that the transmission long hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 in which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed downward by the transmission pin 3142a. The lock member 3141 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the bearing hole 3141b (see FIG. 136).

  When the lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the restricting portion 3141c with which the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 abuts from above is moved to the tip side (right end side). ) Moves upward and rotates to move to the left. That is, as the lock member 3141 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the back movable decorative body 3120 rises through the lock protrusion 3122a by the rising tip side of the restriction portion 3141c, and the tip of the restriction portion 3141c. The side slides to the left on the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a.

  Thereafter, when the lock member 3141 further rotates counterclockwise, and the tip of the restricting portion 3141c moves to the left from the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a of the back back movable decorative body 3120, the back back movable decorative body 3120 loses support from below by the restricting portion 3141c, and the back movable decorative body 3120 falls due to the acting gravity (see FIG. 136). That is, the lock member 3141 is from the lock position where the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c is in contact with the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a to the position where the tip of the restricting portion 3141c is to the left of the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a (release position). When turning in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back movable ornament 3120, which has been restricted from being locked (locked), is unlocked, and the back movable ornament 3120 is in the standby position. Free fall from.

  The back movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen from the standby position is such that the lower surface of the left slider 3122 contacts the contact receiving portion 3146c of the damper 3146, and the piston rod 3146b sinks into the damper main body 3146a via the contact receiving portion 3146c. The impact of the fall of the back movable decorative body 3120 is absorbed by the spring and the viscous fluid in the damper main body 3146a. Then, before the lower surface of the left slider 3122 comes into contact with the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, the falling of the back movable decorative body 3120 stops, and the lower slider 3122 enters the lowered position.

  When the back movable decorative body 3120 is in the lowered position, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the left slider 3122 and the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, and the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is It is located sufficiently below the lower surface of the slider 3122 (the upper end of the protective stopper 3147). That is, the back-back movable decorative body 3120 that has freely dropped from the standby position to the lowered position is configured not to contact any member other than the damper 3146.

  As a result, even if the large rear back movable decorative body 3120 that extends to the left and right at substantially the same length as the full width of the effect display device 1600 is freely dropped at the same height from the top to the bottom of the effect display device 1600, the damper 3146 Other members are not in contact with each other, and other members are not damaged by a large impact. Further, even if the damper 3146 cannot sufficiently stop the back movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen freely, the damper 3146 abuts against the protective stopper 3147 in a state in which the kinetic energy is attenuated. Thus, the falling of the back movable decorative body 3120 can be stopped without damaging the protective stopper 3147. Further, since the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is positioned below the upper end of the protective stopper 3147, the back-back movable decorative body 3120 that has freely dropped does not come into contact with the guide protrusion 3134b, and can be moved back-and-back. Breakage of the slide guide 3134 due to the contact of the decorative body 3120 can be prevented.

  After the back movable movable body 3120 is dropped to the lowered position, the spiral guide 3133 is rotated in the opposite direction (here, the clockwise direction in plan view) by the back back drive motor 3135, and then the slide guide 3134. Rises. When the release protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 pushes the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward and the transmission slider 3142 is slid downward, the slide guide 3134 is lifted, and the transmission slider 3142 is locked spring. Since it is urged upward by 3143, the transmission slider 3142 slides upward together with the slide guide 3134 (guide protrusion 3134b).

  When the transmission slider 3142 slides upward, the transmission pin 3142a moves upward. Therefore, the transmission long hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed upward by the transmission pin 3142a, and the lock member 3141 is moved. The bearing hole 3141b is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. When the transmission slider 3142 further slides upward along with the slide guide 3134, the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, and the lock member 3141 rotates further in the clockwise direction. In addition to being restricted, sliding upward of the transmission slider 3142 is restricted. As a result, the lock member 3141 returns from the unlocked position to the locked position.

  From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the rear rear drive motor 3135, the upward movement of the transmission slider 3142 is restricted as described above, so that the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 The guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves upward, and only the slide guide 3134 moves upward. Then, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving upward comes into contact with the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 in the lowered position from below, and the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is interposed via the left slider 3122. Moves upward together with the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137).

  In this back movable movable effect unit 3110, after the back back movable decorative body 3120 is dropped, it is moved upward from the lowered position by the slide guide 3134 so that the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is between the standby position and the lowered position. In the state where the rear back drive motor 3135 is rotated, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 can be arbitrarily moved up and down by the slide guide 3134 by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back back drive motor 3135 (see FIG. 137). ).

  Then, when the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3135 and the back back movable decorative body 3120 moving upward from the lowered position together with the slide guide 3134 moves to a height near the standby position, The lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable ornament 3120 abuts on the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 in the locked position from below. From this state, when the lock protrusion 3122a (backward movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 is inclined, so that the lock protrusion 3122a of the guide portion 3141d A leftward force is applied to the contacted portion.

  Therefore, as the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward, the lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing hole 3141b by a leftward force acting on the guide portion 3141d. (See FIG. 138). At this time, in the lock member 3141, the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end portion of the main body 3141a moves downward due to the rotation in the counterclockwise direction. The lock member 3141 is counterclockwise against the biasing force of the lock spring 3143 acting in the clockwise direction via the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 inserted in the transmission long hole 3141g of the portion 3141f. To turn.

  Thereafter, when the lock protrusion 3122a further moves upward, the restricting portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d protruding to the right from the main body portion 3141a are locked by the further rotation of the lock member 3141 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It moves to the release position on the left side of the protrusion 3122a, and the upper surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward from the restricting portion 3141c. When the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward and the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward from the tip of the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, the contact with the guide portion 3141d is released. As a result, the lock member 3141 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and changes from the release position to the lock position. In a state in which the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position, the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a is located above the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c.

  Then, the lock projection 3122 a (back movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back decorative effect unit 3150. Then, the driving of the back rear drive motor 3135 stops, and the back back movable decorative body 3120 stops at the retracted position. That is, the back movable ornament 3120 returns to the normal state.

  As described above, when the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and the back back movable decorative body 3120 is put on standby. It can be freely dropped from the position to the lowered position. Thereby, a large play (back and rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can be shown to the player as a movable effect that freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player. It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  Next, the back and back decoration effect unit 3150 of the back and back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141 and the like. The back and rear decoration effect unit 3150 has a square-shaped frame-shaped unit base 3151 and a transparent flat plate-shaped back second light guide plate that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 and closes the frame of the unit base 3151. 3160, a transparent frame-like back and rear decorative lens 3152 which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 in front of the back second light guide plate 3160, and is decorated so that the glass is broken, The back rear upper decorative substrate 3153 is provided between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 above the back second light guide plate 3160.

  The back rear decoration rendering unit 3150 has two decoration body detection sensors 3154 for detecting the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back back movable decoration body 3120 and two detection pieces of the slide guide 3134 of the back back movable mechanism 3130. A slide detection sensor 3155 and a condensing lens 3156 disposed below the back second light guide plate 3160 and extending left and right are provided.

  The back rear decoration rendering unit 3150 is attached between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decoration lens 3152 on the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160, and faces the left and right side surfaces of the back second light guide plate 3160. A pair of left and right fifth pattern substrates 3171 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 below the back second light guide plate 3160. A pair of sixth pattern substrates 3172 mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a which are attached and capable of irradiating light toward the lower surface of the back second light guide plate 3160.

  The unit base 3151 of the back decoration effect unit 3150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the unit frame 3131. The back decorative lens 3152 is formed in a quadrilateral whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit frame 3131. The unit frame 3131 has a transparent flat plate-like decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side and is formed in such a shape that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The frame-like back decorative lens 3152 is formed in such a shape that the inside protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3151 in a front view, and the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. In the back decorative lens 3152, the edge of the portion protruding inward is formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

  The back upper decorative substrate 3153 is arranged in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a that can irradiate light downward are mounted on the front surface. The back rear upper decorative substrate 3153 is in contact with the rear surface of the back rear decorative lens 3152 on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a are arranged from the side of the frame-shaped back rear decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated inside.

  The decorative body detection sensor 3154 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the left fifth pattern substrate 3171 so that the detection piece of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 located between the retracted position and the standby position can be detected. ing. The two slide detection sensors 3155 detect the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 when the back movable decorative body 3120 is in the retracted position, and the upper part of the front surface of the left fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the slide guide 3134. The guide protrusion 3134b is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left fifth graphic substrate 3171 so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 can be detected when the guide protrusion 3134b is at a height at which the guide protrusion 3134b comes into contact with the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142. It has been.

  The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 is mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a arranged in the vertical direction on the rear surface. The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are arranged on the front surface in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b for illuminating and decorating the back rear decorative lens 3152 are mounted thereon. The left fifth substrate 3171 is mounted such that a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface can irradiate light to the right, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface emit light to the right. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. In the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side, the rear surface of the rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are rearward inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3152. The decorative lens 3152 is mounted so that light is emitted.

  Further, the right fifth substrate 3171 is mounted such that the rear light guide plate LEDs 3171a can irradiate light toward the left, and the front LEDs 3171b toward the left. It is mounted so that it can irradiate light. The rear surface of the back decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the right fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back decorative lens 3152. The rear decoration lens 3152 is mounted so that light is emitted to the inside.

  In the sixth pattern substrate 3172, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a are mounted on the rear surface so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and are arranged in the left-right direction on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs 3172b capable of irradiating the light is mounted. The sixth pattern substrate 3172 can be incident on the inside of the back second light guide plate 3160 via the condenser lens 3156 when light is irradiated upward from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a on the rear surface. In the sixth pattern substrate 3172, the rear surface of the back decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3172b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of 3152.

  With the above configuration, the back decorative lens 3152 causes the LED 3153a of the back back upper decorative substrate 3153, the LED 3171b of the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171, and the LED 3172b of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 to emit light. Can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding to the inside of the frame. Thereby, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

  The back second light guide plate 3160 includes a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the top and bottom directions. And a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex sixth reflecting portions that reflect only forward. That is, when the back decoration rendering unit 3150 causes the light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 to emit light, the fifth pattern 3161 can be caused to emit light, and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 can be displayed. When the light is emitted, the sixth pattern 3162 can be displayed with light emission.

  The back second light guide plate 3160 has fine irregularities formed on an infinite number of fifth reflecting portions forming a fifth pattern 3161 and an infinite number of sixth reflecting portions forming a sixth pattern 3162. The light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 appear transparent and are displayed on the rear effect display device 1600 when not emitting light. It is possible to visually recognize the effect image or the like in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the fifth pattern 3161 is a pattern having a guidance (message) for a player consisting of characters “Chance!” In a pattern like a sandstorm as a whole. As shown in FIG. 141, the sixth pattern 3162 is a pattern in which broken pieces of glass are scattered. The sixth pattern 3162 has fewer pieces of scattered glass than the third pattern 3211 of the back middle production unit 3200 described later.

  As shown in the drawing, the letters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and therefore, the three at the center of the LED 3171a for the light guide plate arranged at the top and bottom of the left and right respectively. When only the light is emitted, only the characters “Chance!” Can be displayed. Alternatively, when the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a at the center in the vertical direction are turned off and the remaining light guide plate LEDs 3171a are caused to emit light, the entire display can be light-emitted in a state where the characters “Chance!” Are not visible (difficult to see). .

  It should be noted that the LEDs mounted on the back rear upper decorative substrate 3153, the pair of fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the sixth pattern substrate 3172 in the back rear decoration rendering unit 3150 are all side view type full color LEDs. .

  As shown in the figure, the back and back decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment has a back and back top decoration board 3153, a pair of fifth picture board 3171, and a sixth picture board 3172, each of which is on the back side. The light guide plate 3160 is arranged in parallel with the surface. This can suppress an increase in the size in the front-rear direction in the back and back decoration production unit 3150, and the fifth and sixth patterns 3161 and 3162 and the back and back decoration lens 3152 of the back second light guide plate 3160 are illuminated. Can be made.

  Further, the back and back decoration rendering unit 3150 of the present embodiment arranges a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a for emitting and displaying the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 only on the lower side of the back second light guide plate 3160. The number of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a for emitting and displaying the fifth pattern 3161 is smaller, but a condensing lens 3156 is disposed between the light guide plate LED 3172a and the back second light guide plate 3160. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light spreading from the LED 3172a for the light guide plate from being collected and diffused unnecessarily, and even if the number is small, the sixth pattern 3162 can be displayed with light emission at the optimum brightness. Can do.

[5-9b. Back middle production unit]
Next, the back middle production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144 and the like. FIG. 142 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the back unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 142 (b) is an exploded view of the back unit of the back unit as the main member. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 143 is a front view showing a state in which the third pattern is light-decorated in the back effect unit, and FIG. 144 is a front view showing a state in which the fourth pattern is light-decorated in the back effect unit.

  The back middle production unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the back rear production unit 3100 inside the back box 3010. The inside production unit 3200 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back middle production unit 3200 has a square-shaped frame-shaped unit base 3201 and a transparent flat plate-shaped back first light guide plate 3210 attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closing the frame of the unit base 3201. And a transparent frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 in front of the back first light guide plate 3210 and is decorated so that the glass is broken. The back center left decorative substrate 3203 attached between the unit base 3201 and the back center decorative lens 3202 on the left side of the first light guide plate 3210 and the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged vertically. And a condensing lens 3204 extending.

  The back middle production unit 3200 is mounted between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on the right outer side of the back first light guide plate 3210 and emits light toward the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. It is attached between the unit base 3201 and the back inner decorative lens 3202 on both the upper and lower sides of the back first light guide plate 3210 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a that can be irradiated are mounted. A pair of upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a capable of irradiating light toward both upper and lower surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 are mounted.

  The unit base 3201 of the back effect unit 3200 has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the unit frame 3131 of the back effect unit 3100. The unit base 3201 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side and is formed in such a shape that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The back inner decorative lens 3202 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit base 3201. The frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202 is formed in such a shape that the inner side protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front, and the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The back inner decorative lens 3202 is formed such that the edge of the portion protruding inward is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction.

  The back center left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3203a capable of emitting light toward the right side are mounted on the front surface. The back center left decorative substrate 3203 is in contact with the rear surface of the back center decorative lens 3202 on the front surface, and the plurality of LEDs 3203a on the front surface are inward from the side of the frame-shaped back center decorative lens 3202 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of 3202.

  The third pattern substrate 3221 has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a mounted on the rear surface so as to be able to irradiate light to the left, and is arranged in the vertical direction on the front and is directed to the left. A plurality of LEDs 3221b capable of emitting light are mounted. The third pattern substrate 3221 can be incident on the back first light guide plate 3210 via the condenser lens 3204 when light is emitted leftward from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a on the rear surface. In the third pattern substrate 3221, the rear surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface, and the plurality of LEDs 3221b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202 to the inner side. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of 3202.

  The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 is mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are arranged in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b for mounting and decorating the back inner decorative lens 3202 are mounted. The upper fourth pattern substrate 3222 is mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface capable of emitting light downward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface capable of emitting light downward. Has been implemented. The upper surface of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 is in contact with the rear surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are back inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202. The decorative lens 3202 is mounted so that light is emitted.

  The lower fourth substrate 3222 has a plurality of rear light guide plate LEDs 3222a mounted so as to be able to emit light upward, and a plurality of front LEDs 3222b light upward. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. In the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, the rear surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of the back inner decorative lens 3202.

  With the above configuration, the back center decorative lens 3202 causes the LED 3203a of the back center left decorative substrate 3203, the LED 3221b of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the LED 3222b of the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 to emit light. Can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding to the inside of the frame. Thereby, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

  The back first light guide plate 3210 includes a third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex third reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the top and bottom directions. And a fourth pattern 3212 (see FIG. 144) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex fourth reflecting portions that reflect only forward. That is, when the back effect unit 3200 causes the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221 to emit light, the third pattern 3211 can be caused to emit light, and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 emits light. If it does, the 4th pattern 3212 can be light-emitted and displayed.

  On the back first light guide plate 3210, the innumerable third reflecting portions forming the third pattern 3211 and the infinite number of fourth reflecting portions forming the fourth pattern 3212 are finely formed. The light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221 and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 appear transparent when not illuminated, and the back of the rear back and rear rendering unit 3100. The effect image displayed on the rear movable decorative body 3120 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the third pattern 3211 is a pattern that is split into a plurality of pieces after radial and concentric cracks have entered the glass. Compared to the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the back decorative effect production unit 3150, the third pattern 3211 is drawn with many pieces of scattered glass. As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend obliquely upward and obliquely downward.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is formed so that the diagonally extending stripes correspond to the respective light guide plate LEDs 3222a mounted on the upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222. That is, when one light guide plate LED 3222a emits light, the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction starts from the upper or lower side of the back first light guide plate 3210 closest to the light emitting plate LED 3222a. Two light streaks (V-shaped light streaks) extending obliquely so as to be separated from each other toward the head are decorated with light emission.

  Since the fourth pattern 3212 is farther from the light guide plate LED 3222a as it goes to the center in the vertical direction of the back first light guide plate 3210, the brightness of the V-shaped light streaks is that of the back first light guide plate 3210. It becomes darker toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, when the fourth pattern 3212 is viewed from the front (player side), the light stripes appear to extend rearward toward the center in the vertical direction of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the light is three-dimensional. It is possible to make an illusion that the light is emitted from the back, and to enjoy the light emission effect by the back first light guide plate 3210.

  Note that the LEDs mounted on the back center left decorative substrate 3203, the third pattern substrate 3221, and the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 in the back center effect unit 3200 are all side view type full color LEDs.

  As shown in the drawing, the back middle effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment includes a back center left decorative substrate 3203, a third pattern substrate 3221, and a pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 that guide each plate surface back and forth. It is arranged in parallel with the surface of the optical plate 3210. Thereby, an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction in the back middle production unit 3200 can be suppressed, and the third pattern 3211 and the fourth pattern 3212 of the back first light guide plate 3210, the back inner decorative lens 3202, and the like are decorated with light emission. be able to.

  In the back middle production unit 3200 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a for emitting and displaying the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged only on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. The number of LEDs is smaller than that of the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a for displaying and displaying the fourth picture 3212. A condensing lens 3204 is disposed between the light guide plate LEDs 3221a and the back first light guide plate 3210. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light spreading from the LED 3221a for the light guide plate from being condensed and diffused unnecessarily, and even if the number is small, the third picture 3211 can be displayed with light emission at the optimum brightness. it can.

[5-9c. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. FIG. 145 is a front view of the back right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right effect unit as seen from the front after disassembly for each main member. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit that emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in a normal state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is positioned at the rising end. It is. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state where the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing the state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the descending end with the back-right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing the state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the descending end with the back-right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state where the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing the state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149.

  The back right production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle production unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back right effect unit 3300 includes a back right movable effect unit 3310 attached to the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and a back front right decorative body unit 3350 attached to the front surface of the back right effect effect unit 3310. I have.

  First, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable effect unit 3310 extends with a length shorter than the full width of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape that looks like an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. A movable decorative body 3320 and a back right movable mechanism 3330 which is attached so as to be rotatable about the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction are provided.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 extends in the left-right direction and is mounted on the rear side of the decorative body main body 3321 having the same size as that of the decorative body main body 3321 and the decorative body main body 3321 having a nap. A transparent flat decorative body base 3322, and a back right movable decorative body decorative board 3323 mounted between the decorative body base 3322 and the decorative body main body 3321 and having a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front and rear surfaces (see FIG. 145).

  The decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape imitating nata, and the front end of the left end is the front end of the nata and the lower side is the nata blade. The decorative body main body 3321 has a transparent lower half portion in the vertical direction. In addition, the decorative body 3321 is formed with a crack-shaped decoration that spreads radially around a central portion in the vertical direction near the tip.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 includes a shaft hole 3324 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the base end side which is the right end side in a front view of the decorative body main body 3321 and the decorative body base 3322, and a lower side on the left side of the shaft hole 3324. A cylindrical decorative body side link pin 3325 projecting rearward in the vicinity, and a stopper 3326 projecting rearward in the vicinity of the left side of the decorative body side link pin 3325 are provided.

  The back-right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 includes a plurality of central LEDs 3323a that irradiate light forward at a portion on the front side that is behind the central portion of the crack pattern that radially spreads the decorative body main body 3321. The central LED 3323a is a high brightness LED. Further, the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 includes a plurality of peripheral LEDs 3323b that irradiate light in a direction along the surface of the substrate on the front surface and the rear surface.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 can be illuminated and decorated so that the central portion of the crack pattern of the decorative body 3321 shines by appropriately emitting the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323. By emitting the peripheral LED 3323b of the decorative body decoration substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge and the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 can be illuminated and decorated.

  The back right movable mechanism 3330 of the back right movable effect unit 3310 extends up and down and is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and about 3/4 of the total height from the bottom of the unit base 3331. A bearing having a cylindrical bearing pin 3332a that is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction at a height portion and that projects in the front-rear direction and is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3324 of the back right movable decorative body 3320. And a slider 3332.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 has a back right drive motor 3333 attached to the upper portion of the unit base 3331 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back right drive motor 3333. Motor gear 3334, a transmission gear 3335a projecting in the front-rear direction, and a detection piece (not shown) projecting in the front-rear direction are engaged with the motor gear 3334 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3331. And a spur gear-like link drive gear 3335.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a position obliquely lower right of the link drive gear 3335 when viewed from the front, and in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A transmission link gear 3336 having a transmission arm 3336a that extends and abuts against a transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335, and a transmission gear portion 3336b that extends in an arc shape around the rotation axis, and a unit A spur gear-shaped first gear is mounted on the base 3331 below the rotation axis of the transmission link gear 3336 so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. A spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear portion 3337a and the first gear portion 3337a and has a larger diameter than the first gear portion 3337a. The second gear portion 3337B, and to have two-stage gear 3337 that has, and a.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is formed on the rack main body 3338a and the rack main body 3338a, and the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337. A rack gear portion 3338b that linearly extends in the vertical direction and a columnar movable mechanism side link pin 3338c that protrudes in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the rack body 3338a, A link arm that extends vertically and whose upper end side is rotatably inserted with the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and whose lower end side is rotatably inserted with the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c of the slide rack 3338. 3339.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331, and can be moved back right by detecting a shock absorbing rubber 3340 that can come into contact with the back right movable decorative body 3320 and a detection piece of the link drive gear 3335. Two movable position detection sensors (not shown) for detecting the position of the decorative body 3320 are provided.

  Next, the operation of the back right movable effect unit 3310 by the back right movable mechanism 3330 will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, the back right movable effect unit 3310 has the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 at the rising end and the bearing pin 3332 a of the bearing slider 3332 in the normal state. The back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the proximal end side is rotatably attached is inclined so that the distal end side is located above the proximal end side (initial state). Further, in this state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is such that the center of the decorative body side link pin 3325 is located slightly above the center of the shaft hole 3324 and the decorative body side link pin 3325 is inserted. The stopper 3326 is separated to the left with respect to the upper portion of the link arm 3339. Further, the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is detected by the movable position detection sensor of the first eye.

  In this normal state, the transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is located slightly above the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335 on the right side of the front view, and the transmission of the transmission link gear 3336 is transmitted to the transmission projection 3335a. The arm 3336a is in contact with the right side. More specifically, the rotation center point of the transmission link gear 3336, the transmission projection 3335a, and the transmission arm with respect to the straight line connecting the rotation center point of the link drive gear 3335 and the contact point between the transmission projection 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a. The straight line connecting the contact point with 3336a is orthogonal. In other words, the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the transmission projection 3335a in the transmission arm 3336a passes through the rotation center of the link drive gear 3335 (the revolution center of the transmission projection 3335a).

  As a result, the force acting on the transmission projection 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a passes through the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335, so that the link drive gear 3335 rotates even if the force acts on the transmission projection 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a. No, the transmission link gear 3336 does not rotate in the direction in which the transmission arm 3336a moves to the left in the front view (counterclockwise direction in the front view). That is, in a normal state, the link drive gear 3335 restricts (locks) rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  Incidentally, since the bearing pin 3332a is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts on the bearing slider 3332 via the bearing pin 3332a. doing. In a normal state, the bearing slider 3332 is positioned at the rising end, and therefore, a force is applied to the bearing slider 3332 to move downward due to the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  On the other hand, the back right movable decorative body 3320 has the shaft hole 3324 (bearing pin 3332a) due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 because the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the proximal end side. ), The force to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves downward (counterclockwise direction in front view) is acting. A force to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts on the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c from the decorative body side link pin 3325 via the link arm 3339. That is, a force for moving the slide rack 3338 downward via the link arm 3339 is applied by a force for the back right movable decorative body 3320 to rotate counterclockwise by its own weight.

  The force to move the slide rack 3338 downward is transmitted to the two-stage gear 3337 by the rack gear section 3338b of the slide rack 3338 via the second gear section 3337b meshing with the rack gear section 3338b. The gear 3337 acts to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The second gear 3337 has a force acting to rotate the second gear 3337 in the clockwise direction because the first gear portion 3337a meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. The transmission link gear 3336 acts to rotate counterclockwise via the transmission gear portion 3336b. That is, the transmission link gear 3336 attempts to rotate counterclockwise by the force that the back right movable decorative body 3320 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to its own weight.

  In the normal state, the transmission link gear 3336 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336 because the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is locked by the link driving gear 3335 as described above. The two-stage gear 3337 is not rotated, and the slide rack 3338 is not moved downward by the rack gear section 3338b meshing with the second gear section 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337.

  Thus, since the downward movement of the slide rack 3338 is restricted, the entire link arm 3339 having the lower end attached to the slide rack 3338 does not move downward. Therefore, the back right movable decorative body 3320 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward about the upper end side (the decorative body side link pin 3325) of the link arm 3339. Since the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side of the movable decorative body 3320 is located at the rising end, the counterclockwise rotation about the decorative body side link pin 3325 is restricted, and the back right The movable decorative body 3320 is maintained in an oblique state in which the distal end side is located above the proximal end side.

  In this normal state, when the link drive gear 3335 is rotated clockwise by the back right drive motor 3333 via the motor gear 3334, the transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is moved to the left and downward. It will revolve in the direction of movement. The transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the clockwise direction and changes its position, so that the transmission link gear 3336 in which a counterclockwise force is applied by the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is transmitted. As the projection 3335a slides relative to the transmission arm 3336a, the portion where the transmission arm 3336a and the transmission projection 3335a are in contact with each other is changed to rotate counterclockwise (see FIG. 148). ).

  When the transmission link gear 3336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the slide rack 3338 moves downward via the two-stage gear 3337, and the link arm 3339 moves downward together with the slide rack 3338. Will be. The downward movement of the link arm 3339 causes the decorative body side link pin 3325 supporting the upper end side of the link arm 3339 in the back right movable decorative body 3320 to be pulled downward. Is rotated counterclockwise about the proximal end side shaft hole 3324 so that the distal end side moves downward (see FIG. 148).

  By the rotation of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the center of the decorative body side link pin 3325 supporting the upper end side of the link arm 3339 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 passes through the rotation center of the back right movable decorative body 3320. It moves in a direction approaching the axis extending in the vertical direction. When the back right movable decorative body 3320 rotates to a certain degree in the counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, the upper portion of the link arm 3339 comes into contact with the stopper 3326, and the back right movable decorative body The rotation of 3320 in the counterclockwise direction is restricted and the rotation is stopped (rotation stopped). Accordingly, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is changed from a normal state (initial state) to an oblique state (first state) in which the height on the base end side remains unchanged and the front end side is lower than the base end side. Become.

  When the link drive gear 3335 is continuously rotated in the clockwise direction by the back right drive motor 3333, the slide rack 3338 moves further downward through the transmission link gear 3336 and the two-stage gear 3337, and together with the slide rack 3338 The link arm 3339 will also move downward. However, in the back right movable decorative body 3320, the upper part of the link arm 3339 is in contact with the stopper 3326, so that it further rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3324 on the proximal end side. Therefore, the downward pulling force from the link arm 3339 acts on the bearing slider 3332 via the back right movable decorative body 3320, and the bearing slider 3320 remains in a state where the back right movable decorative body 3320 is stopped. It will move downward together with 3332.

  When the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end, the lower surface of the back right movable decorative body 3320 comes into contact with the impact absorbing rubber 3340 attached to the unit base 3331, and the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is the second. Based on the detection by the second movable position detection sensor, the drive of the back right drive motor 3333 is stopped based on the detection by the second movable position detection sensor (see FIG. 149). As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in a second state in which, in the first state, the tip side remains obliquely below the base end side and has moved downward.

  After the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, the link drive gear 3335 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3333 in a counterclockwise direction in front view which is the opposite direction to the above. When the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the counterclockwise direction together with the link drive gear 3335, the transmission link gear 3336 rotates in the clockwise direction by the transmission arm 3336a in contact with the transmission protrusion 3335a, and the two-stage gear 3337 Thus, the slide rack 3338 moves upward.

  When the slide rack 3338 moves upward from the descending end, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332. It becomes. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward with the tip side kept low until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end. Accordingly, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332 from the second state, and in the state where the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end, the front end side is an oblique side that is lower than the base end side. In the first state (see FIG. 150).

  When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated counterclockwise by the back right drive motor 3333, the transmission link gear 3336 is further rotated clockwise and the slide rack 3338 is moved upward via the two-stage gear 3337. The decorative arm side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339 attached to the slide rack 3338, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 passes through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side. It will rotate in the clockwise direction around the center.

  After that, when the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 rotated counterclockwise by the back right drive motor 3333 is detected by the first movable position detection sensor, the back right drive motor 3333 is driven. The rotation of the link drive gear 3335 is stopped by being stopped. In this state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 are located at the rising end, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is provided. The tip end side is inclined so as to be located above the base end side. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is returned to the normal state (initial state).

  In a normal state, when the back right drive motor 3333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view), the link drive gear 3335 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, whereby the transmission protrusion 3335a. Revolves so that the transmission projection 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a come out of contact with each other, and the restriction of the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction by the transmission projection 3335a is immediately released. The Thereby, the back right movable decorative body 3320 can be changed (moved) at a stretch from the initial state to the second state.

  When the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. 149, the transmission arm 3336a of the transmission link gear 3336 is located within the revolution range of the transmission projection 3335a in the link driving gear 3335. When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated counterclockwise by the right drive motor 3333, the revolving transmission protrusion 3335a comes into contact with the transmission arm 3336a from below. When the transmission projection 3335a further revolves counterclockwise, the transmission projection 3335a rotates the transmission link gear 3336 in the clockwise direction via the transmission arm 3336a. The movable decorative body 3320 returns from the second state to the initial state through the first state.

  In this way, by driving the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is rotated about the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, thereby swinging the material imitated by the back right movable decorative body 3320. It is possible to show the player a movable performance as if it was lowered. Further, the movement of moving the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state through the first state is different from the movement of returning from the second state to the initial state through the third state. It is possible to show the player a plurality of movements and to make the player hard to get bored.

  Further, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the initial state to the second state in which the swing is swung down, the base end side (shaft hole 3324) having the rotation center is moved downward by the bearing slider 3332. Therefore, compared to the case where the base end side is not moved downward, the back right movable decorative body 3320 can appear more on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 is made conspicuous. be able to. Further, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved to the position of the initial state, the base end side where the rotational center is located is moved upward by the bearing slider 3332, so the rotational center of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved. Moves to the upper side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, so that the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state is less likely to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a display area that can be visually recognized well. It can be made wider, and the player can more enjoy the effect image.

  Next, the front right decorative body unit 3350 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The front right decorative body unit 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3331 of the rear right movable mechanism 3330 in front of the rear right movable decorative body 3320, and extends in the vertical direction. A transparent flat front right decorative body 3352 having a shape like a broken glass attached to the front surface of the body base 3351, and attached between the front right decorative body 3352 and the decorative body base 3351. The front right decorative board 3353 (see FIG. 145) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting light toward the left are mounted on the front surface and the lower right rear decorative body 3352 are attached to the lower rear surface. The magnetic sensor 3003 is provided.

  The front right decorative body 3352 extends vertically in an arc shape so as to be positioned leftward as it goes upward. The front right decorative body 3352 is formed in a jagged shape such that the glass is broken on the left side, and a cracked decoration is formed on the front surface. The back right decorative body unit 3350 can light up and decorate the left side edge and the crack pattern by causing the LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3353 to emit light.

[5-9d. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The back effect unit 3400 is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back top production unit 3400 is formed in a shape that looks like an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and extends in the left-right direction, and the left top of the back top movable decorative body 3410. A back-side movable mechanism 3420 that can be rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side, which is the side, and is attached to the front surface of the back-direction production unit 3200. The back movable decorative body 3410 of the back top rendering unit 3400 is disposed in front of the back back movable decorative body 3120 and behind the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  The back movable decorative body 3410 extends in the left-right direction and is mounted on the rear side of the decorative body main body 3411 having the same size as the decorative body main body 3411 and the decorative body main body 3411 extending in the lateral direction. A transparent flat decorative body base 3412, a back movable decorative body decorative board 3413 mounted between the decorative body base 3412 and the decorative body main body 3411 and mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs on the rear surface, and a decorative body A cylindrical shaft pin (not shown) that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the base end side of the base 3412, and a spur gear-like decorative body gear (not shown) that rotates integrally with the decorative body base 3412 and that is centered on the shaft pin. (Omitted).

  The decorative body main body 3411 of the back movable decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape that combines broken glass so as to imitate the nata, and the upper side and the lower side are formed in a jagged manner. The entire decorative body 3411 is transparent. The decorative body main body 3411 is inclined such that the peripheral surfaces of the jagged upper side and the lower side protrude from the front side, and the decoration recessed in a crack pattern is formed on the front side.

  The decorative body base 3412 has an outer shape formed in the same shape as that of the decorative body main body 3411, and is inclined so that the peripheral surfaces of the upper side and the lower side are positioned forward toward the end side. The back movable ornament decorative substrate 3413 is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs can irradiate light in a direction along the surface of the ornament base 3412. The back movable decoration body 3410 can emit and decorate the peripheral edge of the decoration body main body 3411 by causing the LED of the back movable decoration body decoration board 3413 to emit light.

  The back movable mechanism 3420 is attached to the front surface of the back middle production unit 3200, and the unit base 3421 to which the shaft pin of the back movable decoration body 3410 is rotatably attached, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3421, and is a rotation shaft. Projecting rearwardly, a backside drive motor 3422 and a transmission gear (not shown) that is rotated by transmission from the backside drive motor 3422 and meshes with a decorative body gear of the backside movable decorative body 3410 And.

  In the normal state, the back top production unit 3400 is in a retracted position in which the back top movable decoration body 3410 extends horizontally. The body 3410 can be in a state of an appearance position where the distal end side, which is the right end side, is positioned below the proximal end side and extends obliquely.

[5-9e. Bottom production unit]
Next, the back bottom production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back lower effect unit 3500 is attached to the center in the left-right direction at the lower front of the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The under back direction production unit 3500 has a back bottom movable decorative body 3510 that has a flower having a plurality of petals, and a back bottom movable decoration body that is attached to the lower front portion of the back middle direction production unit 3200 and moves the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the vertical direction. A mechanism 3520.

  The under back movable decorative body 3510 is three-dimensionally formed and is mounted with a decorative body main body 3511 having a flower having a plurality of petals and a plurality of full color LEDs for emitting and decorating the decorative body main body 3511. And a lower movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512. The back lower movable decorative body 3510 is disposed in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  The lower back movable mechanism 3520 is attached to the front surface of the back middle production unit 3200 and is attached to the lower part of the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A back lower drive motor 3522 attached to the rear surface and having a rotating shaft protruding forward, and revolving around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction by driving the back lower drive motor 3522 to move the decorative body main body 3511 in the vertical direction. And an elevating drive gear (not shown) having a drive pin.

  In the normal state, the back lower direction production unit 3500 is in the lowered position in which the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is lowered most, and the drive pin on which the lifting drive gear revolves is located at the bottom dead center. In this state, when the drive pin is revolved by rotating the lifting drive gear by the backside drive motor 3522, the backside movable decorative body 3510 is raised together with the upward movement of the drive pin that revolves. When the drive pin reaches the top dead center, the drive of the back and bottom drive motor 3522 is stopped, and the rotation of the lift drive gear (revolution of the drive pin) is stopped. Thereby, it will be in the state of the raise position where back back movable decoration object 3510 moved to the uppermost part.

[5-9f. Front production unit]
Next, the back front production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The front front effect unit 3600 is formed in a C shape along the inner shape of the game area 5a, and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The front rendering unit 3600 is formed in a substantially C shape in a front view, the outer periphery is formed so as to follow the inner shape of the game area 5a, and the inner periphery has fragments left on the window frame. A transparent flat plate-like front decorative body 3601 formed in a jagged shape like a broken glass, and a flat decorative base 3602 attached to the rear side of the front decorative body 3601 And a front decorative board 3603 that is mounted between the decorative base 3602 and the front decorative body 3601 and for decorating the front decorative body 3601 with light emission.

  The front effect unit 3600 guides the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 of the front unit 2000 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 downward to be discharged onto the board holder 1200. A guideway (not shown) is provided. In addition, the front effect unit 3600 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and a first start port that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. A sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism applied in the game area 5a are attached.

  The front front decorative body 3601 of the front front rendering unit 3600 is inclined so that the inner peripheral surface protrudes the rear side from the front side, and a decoration recessed in a crack pattern is formed on the front side. . The back front decorative substrate 3603 is composed of a back front upper decorative substrate 3603a, a back front left decorative substrate 3603b, and a back front lower decorative substrate 3603c (see FIG. 127). The back decorative board 3603 is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs face the C-shaped central side. The front front rendering unit 3600 can light-decorate the inner peripheral surface of the front front decorative body 3601 and the crack pattern by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front front decorative board 3603 to emit light.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 159 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back and back movable decorative body of the back and back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to the lowered position. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between the standby position and the lowered position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit as moved from the initial state to the first state. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 155 to the first state.

  FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back movable decoration body of the back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 158 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom effect unit in the back unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 159 shows the back movable movable body of the back stage production unit in the lower position, the back right movable decorative body of the back right production unit to the second state, and the back movable movable body of the back production unit appears. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom effect unit is moved to the raised position.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a start unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, a center accessory 2500, and the like. Since it is formed transparently, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 114, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the rear unit 3000 are passed through them. The front right decorative body 3352 of the back right rendering unit 3300, the back front decorative body 3601 of the back front rendering unit 3600, and the like can be seen well.

  In this normal state, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 of the back-right effect unit 3300 is positioned in the initial state, and is located in the lower part positioned below the inside of the C-shaped front decorative body 3601. The part faces forward. In addition, the back movable movable body 3410 of the back top rendering unit 3400 disposed behind the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the retracted position, and is positioned below the back right movable decorative body 3320. A part of the lower part is facing forward.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 of the back rear rendering unit 3100 disposed behind the back top movable decorative body 3410 is in the retracted position, and is positioned below the back top movable decorative body 3410. A small part of the tip imitating Nata is facing forward. That is, in the normal state, the rear back movable decorative body 3120 is hardly visible. In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 of the lower back direction rendering unit 3500 is in a lowered position, and a part of the portion located above the inside of the C-shaped front front decorative body 3601 is Looking forward.

  The game board 5 provides a rear effect of the back unit 3000 in accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The rear back movable effect unit 3110 of the unit 3100, the back right movable effect unit 3310, the back upper effect unit 3400, and the lower back effect unit 3500 of the back right effect unit 3300 perform predetermined movable effects.

  Specifically, as a movable effect using the back rear movable effect unit 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, the back rear drive motor 3135 is driven via a slide guide 3134. Then, the large back and back movable decorative body 3120 extending in the left-right direction so as to straddle the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a normal state (with the state of the retracted position), and the lock protrusion 3122a is the restriction portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. It is reciprocated in the up-down direction between the state of the standby position in contact with. In this movable effect, most of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 cannot be seen well from the player side, so that something can be felt as if it is shaking up and down at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can be expected that something will happen to the player.

  Then, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the rear back drive motor 3135 and brought into contact with the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, and then the release contact portion 3142b is pressed downward by the slide guide 3134. Then, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position, and the back movable movable body 3120 in the standby position at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front view is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. To the lowered position (see FIG. 152). Thereby, a large play (back and rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can be shown to the player as a movable effect that freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player. It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  Thereafter, the back guide drive motor 3135 raises the slide guide 3134 to return the back back movable decorative body 3120 in the lowered position to the normal retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 153, by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back rear drive motor 3135, the back back movable decorative body 3120 is moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 through the slide guide 3134. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center. Accordingly, the back and back movable decorative body 3120 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back and back movable decorative body 3120 and the back The movable decorative body 3120 can be noted, and the movement of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 can be enjoyed.

  As a movable effect using the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Move from the state state to the position of the first state. As a result, it is possible to show the player a moveable effect as if the nata being deceived by the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down. Can be attracted strongly to the back right movable ornament 3320, and it can be thought that there is something good that the Nata is swinging down. Can be raised.

  Then, the back right drive motor 3333 is further driven to move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the position in the first state to the position in the second state (see FIG. 155). Thereby, the lower tip of the back right movable decorative body 3320 comes into contact with the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 of the back bottom rendering unit 3500, and the back imitation of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is It is possible to show the player the effect of cutting the flower imitated by the lower movable decorative body 3510, and to make the player think that there is something good. The expectation for can be raised.

  Thereafter, the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the second state is returned to the initial state through the first state by the back right drive motor 3333. When the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the second state position to the first state position, as shown in FIG. 156, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down in the second state. In this state, the player moves upward, and from the third state to the initial state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 rotates about the base end side so that the tip end side of the nut moves upward. On the other hand, the movement of the back right movable decorative body 3320 that returns to the initial state can be enjoyed.

  Note that the back right movable effect unit 3310 may move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state at once, without temporarily stopping in the first state. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

  As a movable effect using the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 157, the back movable decorative body 3410 in the retracted position is driven to the base end side (left end by driving the back upper drive motor 3422). The display position of the effect display device 1600 is set to the front appearance position. Thereby, the back movable decoration body 3410 that imitates Nata can show the player a movable effect that appears in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The back movable ornament 3410 is formed as if the glazed nata is composed of broken pieces of glass, so that it can be seen integrally with the back front ornament 3601 in the normal retracted position. Since it is difficult to notice the presence, it is possible to make the player appear as if a part of the front decorative body 3601 has moved by moving to the appearance position, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  As a movable effect using the lower back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 158, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position by driving the lower back drive motor 3522. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 behind the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 rises, so that the flowers that are trapped by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be easily seen. It can be thought that there is something good, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the rear rear movable production unit 3110 of the rear rear production unit 3100, the rear right movable production unit 3310 of the rear right production unit 3300, the rear upper production unit 3400, and the lower rear production unit 3500. It is also possible to perform a movable effect by appropriately combining the movable effects as described above using. For example, first, the back movable ornament 3410 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back right movable ornament 3320 is moved from the initial state to the second state, and the back movable ornament 3120 is further moved. After falling to the lowered position, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the raised position (see FIG. 159). With this movable effect, since all the movable decorative bodies are positioned in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, it is certain that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) will occur for the player. And can increase the interest of the player. Further, in this movable effect, a plurality of movable decorative objects move sequentially to the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, after one movable decorative object moves to the front of the display screen, the next movable decorative object. Depending on whether or not the body moves to the front of the display screen, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player's expectation can be enhanced, and the player can be made less tired.

  Next, the main light emission effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 166 and the like. FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the third pattern is illuminated and decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle production unit. FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the fourth pattern is light-decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle production unit. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the fifth pattern is light-decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in the back back production unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the sixth pattern is light-decorated on the second back light guide plate of the back back decoration effect unit in the back back effect unit. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing an animation-like light emission effect by a plurality of patterns using the front light guide plate, the back first light guide plate, and the back second light guide plate. FIG. 167 is a front view of the gaming board in which the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit and the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state.

  The game board 5 is a front effect unit of the front unit 2000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 2600, the back rear decoration production unit 3150 of the back rear production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back middle production unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission production.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. 160, it is mounted on the first picture board 2611 arranged on the right side of the front light guide plate 2610 in front view. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is illuminated. Accordingly, the eyes of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the player can be surprised and the gaming state is changed. It can make you think that you are doing, and can raise the expectation for the game.

  Further, as a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 arranged on the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610 are provided. The second pattern 2622 is decorated by emitting light. As a result, the second pattern 2622 is displayed in a light-emitting manner, so that an illusion can be given that the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is provided with a cracked glass on the entire front surface. You can entertain and entertain. In addition, for example, when the second pattern 2622 is displayed in a light emission state during the reach performance, it is possible to make the player think that the reach will be developed, and to increase the expectation for the game.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 162, the light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted on the third pattern substrate 3221 disposed on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are caused to emit light, and the third pattern 3211 is decorated to emit light. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of pieces of glass that have been broken and scattered as the third pattern 3211 are displayed by light emission, so that the player can be entertained and entertained.

  Further, as a light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, a plurality of light guides mounted on the fourth pattern substrate 3222 arranged on the upper and lower outer sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. The light plate LED 3222a is caused to emit light appropriately, and the fourth pattern 3212 is illuminated. Thereby, in the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of V-shaped streaks with perspective are emitted as the fourth pattern 3212, so that the front of the display screen can be clearly displayed. , You can entertain the player with luminous decoration.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 164, the fifth light emission effect arranged at the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160 is used as the light emission effect using the back and back decoration effect unit 3150 in the back and back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pattern substrate 3171 are caused to emit light, and the fifth pattern 3161 is decorated to emit light. Thereby, in the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guidance (message) for the player consisting of the letters “Chance!” Is displayed as the fifth picture 3161, so that the chance is given to the player by the guidance. Can be suggested, and the expectation for a game can be raised.

  In addition, as a light emission effect using the back decoration effect unit 3150, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, a plurality of elements mounted on a sixth pattern substrate 3172 disposed below the back second light guide plate 3160. The LED 3172a for the light guide plate is caused to emit light to decorate the sixth pattern 3162 with light emission. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of pieces of glass that are broken and scattered as the sixth pattern 3162 are displayed by light emission, so that the player can be entertained and entertained.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 have a movement like an animation by sequentially decorating the mutually related patterns with light emission decoration. A light emission effect can be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, the second design 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610, the third design 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the sixth design 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 in this order. When (light emission display) is performed, after the transparent glass is cracked, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect with movements such that the broken glass pieces are scattered. At this time, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged in the rear in this order, so that when viewed from the player side, the broken glass pieces scatter back. It is possible to show a continuous light-emitting decoration with a three-dimensional effect and entertain the player.

  As a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 and the back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 is used. The back right drive motor 3333 moves the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the normal initial state to the position of the second state where the back imitation of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 disposed on the right side of the light guide plate 2610 in front view is caused to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is decorated with light emission. In this state, as shown in the drawing, the central portion of the radial crack pattern formed on the front surface of the back right movable decorative body 3320 behind the pupil portion of the eyes of the predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 Is located. In this state, if the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decoration board 3323 is caused to emit light, the light of the first pattern 2621 that is displayed and illuminated will shine so that the player has a strong impact. It is possible to surprise the player and to make it seem that an advantageous game state such as “big hit game” will occur, and to increase the expectation of the game.

  Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and to make the player hard to get tired. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning mouth sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the big winning opening 2005 The first winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting B and the first receiving opening sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received by the first receiving opening 2007 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, are detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403. The second receiving port sensor 2405 for detecting the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008 and the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a The magnetic sensor 3003 for sensing the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O ports.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the V winning port solenoid 2416 to A drive signal is output, the status display of the function display unit 1400, the normal symbol display, the normal hold indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special hold number indicator, the second from the main control I / O port A drive signal is output to a special symbol display, a second special reservation number display, a round display, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the big prize port sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 are not included. Whereas a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general prize opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the big prize opening sensor 2403, the first The detection of the game ball B by the receiving port sensor 2404 and the second receiving port sensor 2405 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity winning switches 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 also use proximity switches that have high durability and a long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation. .

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  The decorative body detection sensor 3154 and slide detection sensor 3155 of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, the movable position detection sensor of the back right effect unit 3300, the back effect unit 3400 and the back effect unit 3500 Detection signals from various detection sensors such as a detection sensor for detecting the position of the movable decorative body are input to the peripheral control MPU. In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect driving board 1720 of the gaming board 5 are a plurality of serials different from the display command. This is performed by the input / output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The effect drive board 1720 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 or receives the gaming board side lighting / flashing command. Based on the lighting signal or the flashing signal, the game board 5 is output to the LED of each decorative board.

  In addition, the effect drive board 1720 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3 and each drive motor provided in the game board 5. Etc.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side ball 2300 and the obstacle nail N move toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 is obtained. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002, the general winning port 2001, etc. of the start port unit 2100 may be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit). , It is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, the gate unit 2003 and the second start port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate unit 2003 with a certain probability.

  Then, when the game ball B hit right is passed through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start opening that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, The lottery of the special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability fluctuation (probability change)”, “per time reduction (shorter time)” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) In addition, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and is drawn by lottery. Special lottery results include “Lost”, “Small Bonus”, “2R Big Bonus”, “5R Big Bonus”, “15R Big Bonus”, “Per Probability (Probability Change)”, “Short Time (Time Reduction)”, “ "Short-term accuracy change" Per "," the second big hit (for example, per character object) ", and the like.

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special variation time has elapsed, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or to the big winning opening 2005. An open / close pattern that closes the game ball B in an unacceptable state when one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “per bonus item”, the first winning entrance 2005 is allowed to receive the game ball B in a predetermined pattern and then the first entrance for a predetermined time. When the game ball B can be received at the 2007 (V winning opening) and the game ball B is received at the first receiving port 2007, an ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is to maintain a certain change or short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, and the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the rear unit 3000, Using the effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, the back lower effect unit 3500, the front effect effect unit 3600, etc., it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, etc. The player can also be entertained by the performance, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the front effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the selected lottery result. 2600, the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back middle effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, the lower back effect unit 3500, the front effect effect unit 3600, etc. In addition, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The effect display device 1600 in the present embodiment is an effect display means of the present invention, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the present embodiment is the movable decorative body of the present invention, and the present embodiment. The spiral shaft 3133 and the rear rear drive motor 3135 of the rear rear movable mechanism are used as the driving means of the present invention, the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 in this embodiment is used as the transmission section of the present invention, and the lock spring 3143 in this embodiment is used in the present invention. In this embodiment, the damper 3146 corresponds to the fluid damper of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the game area 5a is formed on the front surface, and the transparent game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is passed through the center of the front-view game area 5a. An effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an image is arranged, and the back and rear movable decoration in the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is located above the front view game area 5a between the effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100. A body 3120 is arranged, and the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 decorates the upper part in the game area 5a in a front view. Then, when the back guide drive motor 3135 of the back back movable mechanism 3130 moves the slide guide 3134 to the lower moving end, the slide guide 3134 comes into contact with the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, and the transmission slider 3142 is moved upward. The transmission slider 3142 is slid downward together with the slide guide 3134 by pressing the release contact portion 3142b downward against the urging force of the lock spring 3143 that is biased toward the bottom. When the transmission slider 3142 slides downward, the upper transmission pin 3142a also slides downward together, so that the lock pin inserted and engaged with the transmission pin 3142a by the downward movement of the transmission pin 3142a. The lock member 3141 rotates from the lock position to the release position via the transmission elongated hole 3141g of the transmission protrusion 3141f of 3141, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120 that is in contact with the restriction portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. However, the contact with the restricting portion 3141c is released, and it falls (moves) to the moving end on the lower side so as to traverse the front of the effect display device 1600 due to gravity constantly acting on the back movable ornament 3120. Then, it collides with the damper 3146 and stops.

  Then, after the back rear movable decorative body 3120 falls, if the slide guide 3134 is moved to the upper side opposite to the lower side by the rear rear drive motor 3135, the downward pressing of the release contact portion 3142b is released. Then, the transmission slider 3142 slides upward by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and the lock member 3141 is locked from the release position via the transmission long hole 3141g of the transmission projection 3141f by sliding of the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142. Rotate to position. Thereafter, when the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved upward via the slide guide 3134 moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3135, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is formed on the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141. The locking member 3141 rotates to the release position side against the urging force of the lock spring 3143 via the transmission slider 3142, and the lock protrusion 3122 a of the back movable decorative body 3120 moves the restricting portion 3141 c of the lock member 3141. It is possible to move upward to a position beyond it. When the lock projection 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 moves above the lock member 3141, the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143 via the transmission slider 3142, and the back rear movable decorative body. The body 3120 will return to the normal state where it is located at the upper part in the game area 5a in front view.

  In this way, when the slide guide 3134 is moved to the lower moving end by the rear rear drive motor 3135 and the lock member 3141 is moved from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, the effect display device 1600 is moved in the horizontal direction. Since the large back and back movable decorative body 3120 that straddles the top of the effect display device 1600 falls (moves) so as to cross the front side, the back and back movable decorative body 3120 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. By blocking the effect image, the player can be made aware of the movement of the back movable ornament 3120, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back movable ornament 3120. In addition, when the large back-back movable decoration body 3120 falls, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-back movable decoration body 3120. It is possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is generated, and to increase a sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the back movable ornament 3120 collides with the damper 3146 and stops, the load and inertia force of the back movable ornament 3120 can be absorbed by the damper 3146, and the back movable ornament can be absorbed. The impact on the body 3120 can be reduced to make it difficult to break, and the game can be prevented from being interrupted due to breakage of the back movable decoration body 3120. It is possible to entertain the game with certainty and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is sized so as to straddle the effect display device 1600, and the weight of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 increases, so that it is dropped downward by gravity that is constantly acting. It is assumed that the inertial force acting on the rear back movable decorative body 3120 increases, but since the damper 3146 is provided in the vicinity of the moving end on the lower side, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 having increased weight is attached to the damper 3146. By the collision, the shock due to the large inertia force can be sufficiently absorbed by the damper 3146 to stop the back movable movable body 3120, and the large back rear movable decorative body 3146 is hardly damaged and is similar to the above. An effect can be produced.

  Moreover, since the protective stopper 3147 that restricts the downward movement of the back movable ornament 3120 is provided, the moment of the back movable ornament 3120 is too good or the damper 3146 deteriorates. When the back movable ornament 3120 cannot be stopped by the damper 3146, the back movable ornament 3120 comes into contact with the protective stopper 3147, so that the back movable ornament 3120 moves further downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the back-back movable decorative body 3120 from colliding with other members and damage the back-back movable decorative body 3120 and other members, and the above-described effects can be ensured. Can play.

  Further, even if the damper 3146 is deteriorated or damaged, the back movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the protective stopper 3147. (Contact sound) will be generated, so that the contact sound can make the player and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed recognize that a defect has occurred, Maintenance can be performed before a serious problem occurs such that the back movable ornament 3120 or the like is broken and the game is interrupted.

  Further, since the impact due to the collision of the back movable movable body 3120 can be absorbed by the damper 3146, the back movable movable body 3120 is further increased in size and weighted by gravity constantly acting downward. Even if the inertial force when falling is further increased, the impact by the large inertial force can be sufficiently absorbed by the damper 3146 to stop the backside movable decorative body 3120, and even the large backside movable decorative body 3120 is damaged. Can be difficult. Therefore, a variety of movements are possible in which a different movable decorative body is provided together with a drive source (for example, a drive motor, a solenoid, etc.) that increases the weight of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 or increases in weight. The back and rear movable decorative body 3120 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 can be more enjoyed by the player.

  Furthermore, when the slide guide 3134 is moved from the lower side by the rear rear drive motor 3135 to a position where the portion that comes into contact with the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 is lower than the moving end on the lower side of the rear rear movable decorative body 3120. The slide guide 3134 contacts the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, slides the transmission slider 3142 downward against the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and moves the lock member 3141 from the lock position via the transmission slider 3142. Since it is made to rotate to the release position, when the lock by the lock member 3141 is released and the rear back movable decorative body 3120 is dropped downward, the slide guide 3120 that can come into contact with the back rear movable decorative body 3120. The part of the back movable movable body 3120 that contacts the rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved downward. Since the rear back movable decorative body 3120 collides with the damper 3146, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 does not collide with the slide guide 3134, and the slide moves. Damage to the guide 3134 and the back movable decorative body 3120 can be prevented.

  Further, the back rear drive motor 3135 causes the slide guide 3134 to move from the position below the lower moving end of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 to the lower side by the lock member 3141 at the lock position. Since it can be moved to a position where the movement can be regulated, the slide guide 3134 is moved from the lower side by the rear rear drive motor 3135 to the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 positioned below the lock member 3141. When the slide guide 3134 is moved in the up-down direction by abutting, the back movable ornament 3120 can be arbitrarily moved in the up-down direction together with the slide guide 3134. Thereby, in addition to the movable effect that the back rear movable decorative body 3120 falls at a stroke to the lower moving end, the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 moves up and down between the lower moving end and the lock member 3141. Since it is possible to perform moving effects such as coming and going and reciprocating so as to vibrate, it is possible to show the player a variety of moving effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing the interest Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the slide guide 3134 that is moved up and down by the back rear drive motor 3135 is in contact with the back back movable decorative body 3120 from the lower side, the two of the lock member 3141 and the back back movable mechanism 3130 are used. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the back movable movable body 3120 from falling. That is, the lock member 3141 and the slide guide 3134 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 can be double-locked, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the back back movable decorative body 3120 falls without permission. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by the free fall of the rear movable decorative body 3120, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142 by the movement of the slide guide 3134 to the lower end, and the slide is driven by one back drive motor 3135. Since both the movement of the guide 3134 and the rotation of the lock member 3141 can be performed, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source such as a solenoid or a drive motor for rotating the lock member 3141, and the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is provided. The increase in the load related to the control of the movable effect using can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the back movable ornament 3120 does not move due to overload, and the back movable ornament 3120. It is possible to make sure that the mobile performance is performed, and to make the player enjoy the mobile performance and suppress the decline of interest. It is possible.

  By the way, since the back movable decorative body 3120 that moves in the vertical direction is sized so as to straddle the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction, and both ends in the left-right direction are movably attached by the slide shafts 3132, The rear movable decorative body 3120 is easily inclined with respect to the left-right direction (horizontal). On the other hand, when unlocking the back rear movable decorative body 3120 by the lock member 3141, the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 is opposite to the lower side to which the back rear movable decorative body 3120 tries to move. The lock member 3141 is rotated so as to move upward, so that the lock protrusion 3122a of the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 is difficult to be removed from the restricting portion 3141c. Thereby, even if the back movable ornament 3120 tilts, the lock protrusion 3122a does not come off from the restricting portion 3141c, and the back movable ornament 3120 can be prevented from falling down on its own. Therefore, since the back movable ornament 3120 can be prevented from falling without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful due to the back falling movable ornament 3120 being arbitrarily dropped. Can be released at a desired timing according to the game state and the back movable ornament 3120 can be dropped, and the effect of the movable effect using the back movable ornament 3120 can be surely exhibited. be able to.

  Further, since the lock member 3141 is provided with a transmission protrusion 3141f that protrudes in a direction (left-right direction) intersecting with the vertical direction in which the back movable ornament 3120 moves, a transmission elongated hole 3141g of the transmission protrusion 3141f. When the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 inserted / engaged is slid in the vertical direction and the transmission projection 3141f is pressed in the vertical direction, the lock member 3141 is easily rotated via the transmission projection 3141f. The pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying the effect image on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to entertain the player even with the effect image, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Can do. Further, the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image displays the effect image adapted to the movement of the back movable decorative body 3120, whereby a collaboration effect (for example, the effect image of the back movable ornament 3120 and the effect image) is displayed. , An effect in which the back movable ornament 3120 is moved by the character displayed as the effect image, an effect in which the character is moved by moving the back movable ornament 3120, etc.) It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by various effects and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Also, as described above, when unlocking the back movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 is rotated so that the restricting portion 3141c moves upward, so that the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Even if the weight of the back back movable decorative body 3120 increases, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back back movable decorative body 3120 is disengaged from the restricting portion 3141c. Since it can be made difficult, the back movable ornament 3120 can be sufficiently locked by the single lock member 3141. Since only one lock member 3141 is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing them as compared to the case where a plurality of lock members 3141 are provided, and the lock member 3141 is provided. Can be made as small as possible, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 can be made relatively large and conspicuous.

  Furthermore, since the lock member 3141 is attached in the vicinity of the upward movement end of the back movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 moves from the restricting portion 3141c (standby position) to the downward movement end (downward position). The distance can be made as long as possible. Therefore, by allowing the back movable ornament 3120 to fall a long distance, the player's interest can be easily attracted to the back movable ornament 3120 and a strong impact can be given to the player. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the lock member 3141 is attached in the vicinity of the upward moving end of the back movable decorative body 3120, a certain distance (space) is formed between the locking member 3141 (the restricting portion 3141c) and the upward moving end. Therefore, when the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the back movable mechanism 3130, it is possible to secure a space in which the restricting portion 3141c can move upward. The member 3141 can be reliably rotated to the release position, and the movement of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 can be locked or unlocked by the lock member 3141.

  Further, since the lock member 3141 is provided with a guide portion 3141d extending obliquely, when the back movable ornament 3120 is moved upward and returned to the original position, a separate drive source (for example, Even if the lock member 3141 is not rotated to the release position side with a solenoid, a drive motor, etc.), the lock protrusion 3122a abuts on the guide portion 3141d as the back movable decorative body 3120 moves, thereby locking The member 3141 can be automatically rotated to the release position side. Therefore, when the back movable movable body 3120 is returned to the original state, it is not necessary to control the rotation of the lock member 3141 by the back rear drive motor 3135 of the back back movable mechanism 3130, and the load for controlling the movable effect is not necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from being entertained due to instability of the control of the movable effect due to overload, and to reduce the interest.

  Further, since the rotation of the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 to the rotation restricting member 3144 restricts the rotation from the lock position to the opposite side to the release position, the lock member 3141 contacts the restricting portion 3141c at the lock position. Even if a force acts downward from the lock protrusion 3122a side of the back movable movable body 3120, the lock member 3141 rotates to the side opposite to the release position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120 Can be prevented from coming off from the restricting portion 3141c, and the back movable decorative body 3120 can be surely prevented from dropping without permission.

  Further, the rear back drive motor 3135 of the back back movable mechanism 3130 is driven to move the slide guide 3134 downward, and the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and then back back movable. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3135 to return the decorative body 3120 to the original state, the lock member 3141 automatically rotates from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. Therefore, after the back movable mechanism 3130 releases the lock and the back movable movable body 3120 is dropped, a separate drive source (for example, a solenoid, a drive motor, etc.) is provided to return the lock member 3141 to the locked position. Even without this, the lock spring 3143 can return the lock position. Therefore, since it is not necessary to control the rotation of the lock member 3141 by the back / back drive motor 3135 of the back / back movable mechanism 3130 only to return the lock member 3141 to the lock position (original state), it is necessary to control the movable effect. The load can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained due to instability of the control of the movable effect due to the overload, and to reduce the interest.

  Further, since the rear back movable decorative body 3120 is moved (dropped) downward by gravity that is constantly acting, a force that moves the back rear movable decorative body 3120 to one side in the vertical direction and the left-right direction. It is not necessary to provide a mechanism for always working, the configuration relating to the movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 can be simplified, the configuration relating to the movement can be made compact, and it has been made compact. It becomes possible to enlarge the back movable decorative body 3120 by the amount of space, make the back movable movable body 3120 stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, entertain the player, and reduce the interest Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front decorative board 3603 and the second picture board 2612 of the front front rendering unit 3600 having a predetermined shape arranged behind the gaming panel (panel board 1110) 1100 are provided. Light guide plate LED 2612a, light guide plate LED 3172a of sixth pattern substrate 3172, and light guide plate LED 3221a of third pattern substrate 3221, and second pattern 2622 and sixth pattern 3162 composed of predetermined cracks. , And the transparent flat front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 for emitting and displaying the third picture 3211 are disposed in the game area 5a in the front view. It is attached to the rear side so as to close the inside of the frame of the transparent structural member 1000 having a transparent frame shape defining the outer periphery of 5a. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge array on the front surface, and a game area in a front view is provided on the panel plate 1110 of the transparent flat gaming panel 1100 having a game area 5a formed on the front surface. In the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the game area passes through the center of the opening 1112 after having an opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 to a position eccentric to the upper right with respect to the center of 5a. The side of the direction in which the opening 1112 is decentered from the line orthogonal to the line connecting the center of 5a and the center of the opening 1112 serves as a decoration pattern non-formation region 1102, and the other side is decorated. A pattern formation region 1101 is formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the decoration pattern formation region 1101. Since the decoration pattern 1150 for decorating the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is formed, which is a decoration having a sense of unity with the decoration of the sixth picture 3162 and the third picture 3211, a panel on which light is incident from the side surface of the panel board 1110 In a state where the panel decoration LED 1130a of the decorative board 1130 is not lit, the light from the light emitting decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1 or the effect display device 1600, the pachinko machine 1 installed in the game hall The appearance of the decoration pattern 1150 varies depending on the illumination light, light from other nearby pachinko machines, and the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. The decorations and decoration patterns of the front decorative board 3603, the second picture 2622, the sixth picture 3162, and the third picture 3211 are displayed. With 1150, it becomes possible to show the player the inside of the game area 5a having a clearly different impression (atmosphere) from the conventional pachinko machine in which a decorative sheet is pasted on the game panel, and attract the player's attention strongly. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. .

  When the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident from the side surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is reflected forward by the decoration pattern 1150, so that it can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110. Since the decoration pattern 1150 appears to shine and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated, the decoration pattern 1150 can be made conspicuous, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the player's Interest can be attracted strongly and appeal to the player can be enhanced. Further, by decorating the decoration pattern 1150 with light emission, the appearance of the decoration pattern 1150 can be made different from that when the decoration pattern 1150 is not light emission decoration. Therefore, a gaming panel 1100 (panel) that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. The decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated so that the player may think that there is something good, such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the panel holder 1120 to which the panel decoration board 1130 is attached is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the panel decoration board 1130 attached to the panel holder 1120 has a light-transmitting property. Since it can be made difficult to see with the front component member 1000, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the panel decoration board 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a). This makes it possible for the player to think that the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 does not emit light at the beginning of the game. Can be greatly surprised, and the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150 can be wondered, so that the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the front component member 1000 has translucency, the panel plate 1110 having the game area 5a formed on the front surface is compared with the case where the front component member 1000 is opaque and black. Since it is transparent, the front component member 1000 can have a similar atmosphere to the panel plate 1110, and the boundary between the panel plate 1110 and the front component member 1000 in the front view (the outer periphery of the game area 5a). It is difficult for the player to recognize the game area, and the player can feel the game area 5a wide. It can be recognized that there is, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is disposed in the rear part of the function display unit mounting portion 1011 in the upper left corner and the stamp sticking portion 1012 in the lower left corner, which are part of the four corners of the front component member 1000 in a front view. Since the portion near the function display unit mounting portion 1011 and the certificate sticking portion 1012 in the panel board 1110 is used as the decoration pattern forming area 1101, the panel is close to the decoration pattern 1150 formed in the decoration pattern forming area 1101 of the panel board 1110. The decoration LED 1130a is positioned, and when the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light, the decoration pattern 1150 can be brightly decorated, and the effect when the decoration pattern 1150 is decorated with light emission can be further enhanced.

  Further, since the panel decoration LED 1130a is a side view type and the surface of the panel decoration board 1130 is parallel to the surface of the panel board 1110, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the panel decoration board 1130 is made as thin as possible. Even if the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached, an increase in the thickness of the panel holder 1120 can be suppressed, and the size of the panel decoration substrate 1130 in the front-rear direction is reduced, so that the side surface of the panel plate 1110 can be reduced. The panel decoration substrate 1130 can be easily arranged at a position where the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be effectively incident, and the decoration pattern is formed by making the light incident on the side surface of the panel plate 1110 with a sufficient amount of light. 1150 can be illuminated.

  Further, since the plate surface of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged in parallel with the surface of the panel plate 1110, the width of the plate surface of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is made larger than the thickness in the front-rear direction of the panel holder 1120. Is possible. In this embodiment, the width of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is larger than the thickness of the panel holder 1120 in the front-rear direction, and the inclination of the plate surface (optical axis) due to manufacturing errors, mounting errors, etc. is reduced. Light from the decoration LED 1130a can be reliably irradiated to a desired portion on the side surface of the panel board 1110, and the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 can be surely illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the panel decoration board 1130 is arranged with its plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel board 1110, the width of the panel decoration board 1130 is made larger than the thickness of the panel holder 1120 in the front-rear direction, and the panel decoration board 1130 is arranged. Since the board 1130 is white, it is difficult to recognize the panel decoration board 1130 through the transparent front constituent member 1000, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the rear of the function display unit attachment part 1011 at the upper left corner and the stamp sticking part 1012 at the lower right corner, respectively, of the four corners of the front component member 1000 in a front view. Since light can be incident on the panel plate 1110 from different directions, it is possible to easily spread light to every corner of the decorative pattern 1150 that is widely formed on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Uniform light emission decoration can be achieved.

  In addition, since the panel decoration board 1130 on which the panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted is attached to the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, during transportation, installation work in the game hall, maintenance work, etc. Even if vibration or impact acts on the pachinko machine 1, it can be made difficult to be transmitted to the panel decoration board 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a), and damage due to vibration or impact can be suppressed to reduce deterioration of durability. Can do. Further, since it is possible to make it difficult to transmit vibrations and shocks, it is possible to prevent the positional relationship between the panel decorative substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 from being shifted. In addition to preventing problems, it is possible to make light incident on a desired portion of the side surface of the panel plate 1110, and to decorate the decoration pattern 1150 in a favorable state.

  Further, since the substrate cover 1135 having translucency is used, it becomes possible to irradiate a part of the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a to the transparent front constituent member 1000 in front through the substrate cover 1135, and the panel decoration substrate. Even if 1130 is attached to the substrate cover 1135, the front front structural member 1000 can be decorated with light emission.

  In addition, since the frame-shaped front component member 1000 has a substantially circular shape in the frame that is the same as the game area 5a, and has a rectangular outer shape, the inner periphery and the outer periphery of the front component member 1000 (panel holder 1120) The width is widest at the four corners, and the function display unit attaching portion 1011 and the certificate sticking portion 1012 are provided at the two upper left corners and the lower left corners of the four corners, and the functions of the panel holder 1120 Since the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the rear part of the display unit attachment part 1011 and the certificate sticking part 1012, a space for attaching the panel decoration board 1130 can be easily secured. The pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized.

  Furthermore, the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board mounting recesses 1127 at the four corners (upper left corner and lower left corner) of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the frame-like panel holder 1120 is attached at that part. Since the width between the inner periphery and the outer periphery is wider than other portions, the width of the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be increased in front view. In the present embodiment, since the width of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is increased, the inclination of the panel decoration substrate 1130 due to a manufacturing error, an attachment error, or the like is reduced. Therefore, the panel decoration mounted on the panel decoration substrate 1130 is reduced. The deviation of the optical axis of the LED for LED 1130a is reduced, and the light from the LED for panel decoration 1130a can be reliably irradiated to a desired portion on the side surface of the panel board 1110, and the decoration pattern formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110 1150 can be surely decorated with light emission.

  Further, since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached behind the function display unit attachment portion 1011 and the certificate sticking portion 1012 of the front component 1000, when the panel decoration LED 1130a emits light in order to make the decoration pattern 1150 emit light, A part of the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is irradiated forward, or a part of the light incident on the side surface of the panel board 1110 from the panel decoration LED 1130a is reflected forward by the side surface of the panel board 1110. The function display unit 1400 attached to the function display unit attachment part 1011 of the front component 1000 or the stamp attached to the certificate sticking part 1012 is illuminated from the rear, so that the function display unit 1400 and the certificate paper, or , Light emitting decoration around function display unit 1400 and certificate paper The function display unit 1400 and the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of the certificate paper, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, can give a strong impact to the player, and the function display unit 1400 and the certificate paper The luminescent decoration can make the player think that there is something good, and can increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the front structural member 1000 having translucency, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear of the function display unit attachment portion 1011 at the upper left corner and the stamp sticking portion 1012 at the lower left corner, respectively. Each of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light from the rear at different portions (upper left corner and lower left corner) of the four corners of the front structural member 1000 having translucency. The upper left corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the member 1000 can be decorated with light emission, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  Further, since the board mounting recess 1127 is provided on the front surface of the panel holder 1120, the panel decoration board 1130 is mounted in the board mounting recess 1127 via the board cover 1135 so that the front side of the panel holder 1120 is forward. The panel decoration substrate 1130 (substrate cover 1135) does not protrude, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be attached without increasing the thickness of the panel holder 1120 in the front-rear direction. Further, the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 includes a connection connector 1131a of the panel decoration board 1130 and a connection recess 1128 from which the connection connector 1132a protrudes. When the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board attachment recess 1127, the connection connector 1131a and connection Since the rear end of the connector 1132a is substantially at the same position as the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, the panel plate 1110 can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in the thickness of the panel holder 1120 in the front-rear direction even when the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface can be illuminated.

  Further, since the connection recess 1128 is provided on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, the connector on the other side is connected to the connection connector 1131 a and the connection connector 1132 a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 by inserting a finger into the connection recess 1128. It is possible to improve the workability. Further, as described above, the presence of the connection recess 1128 makes it possible to easily insert and remove the connector without causing the connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel holder 1120. An increase in thickness in the front-rear direction of the panel holder 1120 due to the attachment of the substrate 1130 can be suppressed, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the decoration pattern 1150 that is always visible has a portion along the outer edge that faces the inside of the front front decoration board 3603 in the front front effect unit 3600 disposed behind the game panel 1100. The portion of the decorative pattern 1150 can make it difficult to recognize the outer edge of the front front decorative substrate 3603 when viewed through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 has a portion along the outer edge of the front decorative substrate 3603, the decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 and the shape (decoration) of the front decorative substrate 3603 are similar. Therefore, the front decorative board 3603 and the decorative pattern 1150 can show a decoration with a sense of unity, can show a decoration with a sense of depth, and improve the appearance of the game area 5a in a front view. be able to.

  Furthermore, in a state where the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a are not emitting light, the front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 are transparent. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 can be viewed from the front, and the panel plate of the game panel 1100 A decorative pattern 1150 formed on 1110 can be visually recognized. In this state, when any of the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a and the panel decoration LED 1130a emit light, the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610 and the second second light guide plate 3160 Since the player can show a light emitting decoration in which the decoration of the six patterns 3162 and the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the decoration pattern 1150 are integrated, it has a strong impact on the player. And can attract the player's interest, and can make the player think that there is something good. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed outside the normal light guide region 1103 and the radiation portion 1151 formed in the normal light guide region 1103 within a predetermined range from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 in the gaming panel 1100. A radiation unit 1151 and a radiation light guide unit 1152 that reflects light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 forward and guides it to the radiation unit 1151 that is away from the normal light guide region 1103. Since the light is guided to the radiation part 1151 formed outside the normal light guide region 1103 by the radiation light guide part 1152 of the decoration pattern 1150, the radiation part 1151 far from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be used as a panel. Brightness similar to that of the radiating portion 1151 close to the decorative LED 1130a It is possible to emit light decoration, decorative pattern 1150 can be uniformly luminescent decorative whole, it is possible to improve the appearance of the light emitting decoration decorative pattern 1150.

  Further, since the light can be guided from the panel decoration LED 1130a to the radiation section 1151 at a far position by the radiation light guide unit 1152, the panel decoration LED 1130a is partially connected to the outer peripheral side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Even if arranged, the decoration pattern 1150 can be illuminated and decorated uniformly. Accordingly, there is no need to dispose the panel decoration LED 1130a over the entire circumference of the panel plate 1110, and the panel decoration LED 1130a can be disposed at the upper left and lower left positions in front view where space can be easily secured. It is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from becoming small in order to secure the space for arranging the LEDs 1130a.

  Further, in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the center and the opening of the gaming area 5a (panel plate 1110) pass through the center of the opening 1112 that is eccentrically penetrated to the upper right for mounting the center accessory 2500. The width of the panel plate 1110 is narrow on the side (upper right side) in the direction in which the opening 1112 is eccentric with respect to the line orthogonal to the line connecting the center of 1112, and the opposite side (lower left side) is the panel Since the width of the plate 1110 is wide, the wide side is used as a decorative pattern forming region 1101 and the narrow side is used as a decorative pattern non-forming region 1102, so that the wide decorative pattern forming region 1101 of the panel plate 1110 is used. Since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on the surface, the decoration pattern 1150 becomes larger and the decoration pattern 1150 can be easily seen. 0 of decoration can be to entertain the player. Further, since the decoration pattern 1150 is not formed in the narrow decoration pattern non-formation area 1102 of the panel board 1110, the appearance in the game area 5a is not good even if the decoration pattern 1150 is not formed in the area. In other words, it is possible to avoid wasting the decorative pattern 1150 in a narrow and difficult-to-see region, and to reduce the effort for forming the decorative pattern 1150.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on a part of the rear surface (decoration pattern formation region 1101) of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on the entire rear surface of the panel board 1110. Compared with the case where it makes, the effort concerning formation of the decoration pattern 1150 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a predetermined radius in front view centering on the specific obstacle nail N1 that affects the game content among the plurality of obstacle nails N is set as a decoration prohibited area 1104, and the decoration prohibited area 1104 is avoided. Thus, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed. As a result, the countless gaming balls B abut on the specific obstacle nail N1, and the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or tilted, so that it is impossible to provide a preset flow of the game ball B. In order to prevent this, when the specific obstacle nail N1 is struck and adjusted to a preset state, the decoration pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1 (decoration prohibited area 1104). The current distortion state of N1 can be easily seen, and the maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1 can be facilitated. Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the specific failure nail N1 is hit during maintenance, the impact transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the panel plate 1110 is not affected. It will be attenuated to some extent by the time it reaches the decorative pattern 1150 near the nail N1, and even if stress is concentrated, the force is weakened and the panel board 1110 is cracked or cracked. However, it is possible to facilitate maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1.

  Further, since the decoration prohibition region 1104 is provided, it is possible to clarify the part of the panel board 1110 where the decoration pattern 1150 can be formed, and thus the decoration pattern 1150 is unnecessary for the specific obstacle nail N1. It is possible to avoid moving away from the player, and it is possible to easily form a variety of decoration patterns 1150 and to form a decoration pattern 1150 having a high decorativeness, thereby further increasing the appeal to the player. be able to.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed by avoiding the specific obstacle nail N1 by the decoration prohibited area 1104, the decoration pattern 1150 and the pattern behind the part where the obstacle nail N except the specific obstacle nail N1 is implanted Since there are also overlapping objects, the obstacle nail N that is planted so as to overlap the decoration pattern 1150 is irradiated with light by the decoration pattern 1150 that is decorated with light emission, and the obstacle nail N is irradiated with the obstacle nail N. The tip of the nail N can be shined, and the player can enjoy the light-emitting effects that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as the obstacle nail N and the tip shining.

  In addition, when the decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated with the panel decoration LED 1130a, the portion between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the front component member 1000 that is outside the game area 5a is also caused to emit light by the light of the illumination decoration. it can. Since the portion between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the front component member 1000 can be light-decorated by the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 attached to the portion are attached. Since it is possible to irradiate the pasted certificate paper with light from the rear, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate paper can be decorated with light emission, and the function display that did not emit light with the conventional pachinko machine The unit 1400 and the certificate are decorated with a light-emitting decoration, which can have a strong impact on the player, and the fact that they are decorated with a light-emitting decoration strongly suggests that there may be something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a so as to be visible through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in front view, and more than the effect display device 1600. A transparent back first light guide plate 3210 and a back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged in front, and the transparent first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 extend from the outside to the inside position. A back middle decorative lens 3202 and a back rear decorative lens 3152 are arranged. The light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172, the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222. In the state where no light is emitted, the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are in a transparent state, and the rear effect display device 1600 is passed through the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160. The effect image displayed on the screen can be visually recognized, the displayed effect image can be enjoyed, and the back center decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are difficult to see.

  In this state, when the light guide plate LED 3172a or the light guide plate LED 3221a and the LED 3203a, the LED 3221b, the LED 3222b, the LED 3153a, the LED 3171b, and the LED 3172b are caused to emit light, the front of the effect display device 1600 at the center in the front view game area 5a. The third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 as the specific pattern on which the specific object (broken glass) is drawn is displayed in a light-emitting manner, and the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 is surrounded by the third pattern. The unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 having the same shape as the object of the 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are illuminated and decorated, and the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 emit light. Display and unit base 3151, rear decoration len The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see due to the light emission decoration of the 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202, and the light emission decoration is performed with the third image 3211 or the sixth image 3162 that is light-emitting displayed. The unit base 3151, the back decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 will be conspicuous.

  That is, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 by the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back second light guide plate 3160 and the light emission of the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202. When the light emission effect by decoration is executed, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see. Instead, the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back decorative lens 3152, Since the unit base 3201 and the back inner decorative lens 3202 are conspicuous, it has a strong impact on the player and can be thought of as something good for the player. Can be increased. At this time, the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are separated from the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 in the front-rear direction. And the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction so that the overlapping part protrudes forward. Alternatively, it can be seen as if it is retracted rearward, and a stereoscopic image with perspective can be displayed by light emission, so that the player can be wondered and the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back Second light guide plate 3160, unit base 3151, back decorative lens 3152, unit base 3201, back inner decoration And the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202. It is possible to entertain the player with the light-emitting effect, and to suppress the lowering of interest in the player's game.

  In addition, a transparent unit base 3151, a back rear decorative lens 3152, a unit base 3201, and a back inner decorative lens 3202 formed in the same shape as the specific target portion drawn as the third picture 3211 and the sixth picture 3162 are provided. The third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are provided before and after the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 on which light emission is displayed, and at least three members having different positions in the front and rear direction are provided. Therefore, it is possible to further emphasize the perspective when each of them emits light, and to reliably exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, the inner end faces of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are inclined, and the LED 3203a, LED 3221b, LED 3222b, LED 3153a, LED 3171b, and LED 3172b are replaced with the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the rear rear decorative lens. Light is irradiated to the inside of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 in a direction parallel to the surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 toward the inner end face of the 3152. Therefore, the light irradiated to the inside of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 is reflected forward and radiated forward on the inner end face (the outer peripheral edge facing the inner side). It faces the inside of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 The periphery can be illuminated in a band shape, making it easier for the player to recognize the shapes of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152. And the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are enhanced by emphasizing the outer peripheral shapes of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152. It is possible to easily recognize that the position of the front and rear decorative lenses 3202 and 3152 is different between the front and rear decorative lenses 3202 and 3152, and it is possible to perform a three-dimensional pattern light emission effect with a sense of perspective. .

  In addition, the inner end faces (outer peripheral edges facing inward) of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. As described above, the back inner decorative lens 3202 is provided. Since the reflection direction (or refraction direction) is different from the flat front surface at the outer peripheral edge of the back decorative lens 3152, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and other pachinko machines Depending on the state of light irradiated from the front, such as light from the inside, into the game area 5a, the front surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 appears to be transparent, whereas the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back inner decorative lens 3202 The outer peripheral edge of the rear decorative lens 3152 appears to shine or appear translucent, and the shape and presence of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the rear rear decorative lens 3152 are determined for the player. The can be easier to recognize, it is possible to enhance the decorative effect in the game area 5a by back in decorative lens 3202 and back after decoration lens 3152.

  In addition, after the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction, the objects as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 drawn in time are displayed in time series. Therefore, the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged in the time series order of the objects drawn as the third picture 3211 and the sixth picture 3162 or in the reverse order of the time series. If each of the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the two light guide plates 3160 is sequentially lit and displayed, it is possible to show the player a moving luminescence effect, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be entertained, and can have a strong impact on the player and make the player think that there is something good for them. It is possible to suppress.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying the effect image that is matched with the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 that are emitted and displayed, the third pattern 3211, the sixth pattern 3162, and the back side are displayed. Collaboration effect by the decorative lens 3202 or the back decorative lens 3152 and the effect image (for example, the effect that the glass is broken by the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 by the character displayed as the effect image, The effect that the character of the effect image appears due to the broken glass by the light emission display of the three patterns 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162, etc. can be performed, and it is difficult to get tired of the player by various effects. The decrease can be suppressed.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine (parrot machine) obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the decoration pattern 1150 is configured by a plurality of linearly recessed grooves. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern 1150 is recessed in a dot shape. It may be constituted by a plurality of grooves, constituted by a plurality of protrusions swelled linearly, or constituted by a plurality of protrusions swelled in dots.

  Furthermore, although the crack pattern is shown as the pattern (pattern) of the decoration pattern 1150, the pattern is not limited to this, and the pattern of the decoration pattern 1150 can be a wave pattern, a geometric pattern, a check pattern, a check pattern, or the like. , Scale pattern, pattern imitating the character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, pattern imitating the item according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, pattern imitating the logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, A pattern imitating the background according to the concept may be used.

  In the above embodiment, only the decorative pattern 1150 is formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 (game panel 1100). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The decoration pattern 1150 may be formed on the decoration pattern non-formation area 1102 and a decoration sheet with decoration may be applied to the decoration pattern non-formation area 1102. Alternatively, the decoration pattern 1150 may be avoided in the decoration pattern formation area 1101. The decorative sheet 1 may be affixed ”, or“ a decoration pattern 1150 is formed in the decoration pattern formation region 1101 and then a part of the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is covered so as to cover the decoration pattern 1150 from behind. A decorative sheet with decoration may be pasted on the entire surface.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the front panel decoration board 1130 is provided in the upper left corner and the lower left corner outside the game area 5a in the front view. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A panel decoration substrate may be provided. For example, the panel decoration is also applied to a portion where the width of the frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is narrow (a left outer portion of the game area 5a, a right outer portion of the game area 5a, an upper outer portion of the game area 5a, etc.). A substrate may be provided. In the case where the panel decoration substrate is provided in such a narrow portion, it is desirable that the panel decoration LED is a top view type LED, and the plate surface of the panel decoration substrate is arranged in parallel with the side surface of the panel plate. .

  Further, in the above embodiment, as a movable decorative body on which a force to constantly move to one side in the moving direction is acting, a back side on which a force to constantly move downward by gravity is acting. Although the movable decorative body 3120 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is attached so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and is a force that always moves to one side in the moving direction by the urging force of the elastic member. It may be a movable decorative body that is acted on, or is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a movable decorative body that is constantly acted to move upward by the urging force of the elastic member. good.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1600 Production display device (production display means)
3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear production unit 3110 Back rear movable production unit 3120 Back rear movable ornament (movable ornament)
3121 Decorative body 3122 Left slider 3122a Lock projection 3130 Back and rear movable mechanism (drive means)
3132 Slide shaft 3133 Spiral shaft (drive means)
3134 Slide guide 3135 Rear rear drive motor (drive means)
3141 Lock member 3141a Body portion 3141b Bearing hole 3141c Restriction portion 3141d Guide portion 3141e Stopper 3141f Transmission protrusion 3141g Transmission slot 3142 Transmission slider 3142a Transmission pin (transmission portion)
3142b Release contact portion 3143 Lock spring (lock urging means)
3144 Rotation restriction member 3146 Damper (fluid damper)
3146a Damper body 3146b Piston rod 3146c Contact receiving portion 3147 Protective stopper

Claims (1)

A front component that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area where the game is performed;
A transparent flat gaming panel which is provided on the rear side of the front component member and has the gaming area formed on the front surface;
On the rear side of the game panel, an effect display means provided to be visible from the front through the game panel in the center of the game area in front view, and capable of displaying an effect image,
A movable decorative body which is provided in front of the effect display means and behind the game panel so as to be movable in a predetermined direction and to which a force for moving to a specific side which is one side of the predetermined direction is constantly acting. When,
A locking position that is provided in the vicinity of the moving end of the movable decorative body opposite to the specific side on the rear side of the game panel, and that restricts movement to the specific side by contacting the movable decorative body; A lock member movable between a release position that releases the restriction of movement to the specific side by not contacting the movable decorative body,
A slide guide provided on the rear side of the gaming panel so as to be movable in the predetermined direction, and capable of contacting the movable decorative body from the specific side;
The slide guide from a position on the specific side of the movable decorative body to a position on the specific side to a position where the movable decorative body can be restricted from moving to the specific side by the lock member; and Drive means for moving the lock member between the lock position and the release position;
The movable decorative body is provided near the moving end on the specific side of the movable decorative body on the rear side of the game panel, and the movable decorative body moved to the specific side by a force acting at all times collides with the movable decorative body. A gaming machine comprising a fluid damper that stops movement of a body.